The original of this book is in 
 the Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924026869564 
 

 Date 
 
 Due 
 
 
 
 i M» 
 
 
 
 <3rtii^ ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Cornell University Library 
 PJ 1531.C2 1870 
 
 Decree of Canoous in hieroalvphjcs an^^^ 
 
 3 1924 026 869 564 
 
THE 
 
 DECEEE OF CANOPUS, 
 
 HIEROGLYPHICS AND GREEK, 
 
 TRANSLATIONS, 
 
 AND AN EXPLANATION OF THE HIEKOGLTPHIOAL CHAEACTEES. 
 
 By SAMUEL SHAEPE, 
 
 ACTHOK OF "the HISTOKY OF EGYPT." 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 JOHN RUSSELL SMITH, 36, SOHO SQUARE. 
 
 1870. 
 
WORKS BY.THF AIITHOB. 
 
 BY THF AIITim 
 
 /^CORNELLS 
 
 umyEiisnYl 
 
 EGYPTIAN HIEROaLYPHi<Jahj'int-aa_AMiiit t^ their 
 
 Nature, Origin, and Meaning ; Willi a VOOADUIiAIliY. '^ 
 
 EGYPTIAN INSCRIPTIONS from the British Museum and other 
 sources; 216 Plates, in Folio. 
 
 The EGYPTIAN ANTIQUITIES in the BRITISH MUSEUM 
 described. 
 
 The ALABASTER SARCOPHAGUS of Oimenephah I., with Plates 
 by Joseph Bonomi. 
 
 The TRIPLE MUMMY-CASE of Aroeri-ao, with -Plates by Joseph 
 
 BOHOMI. 
 
 The HISTORY of EGYPT, from the Earliest Times till the Conquest 
 by the Arabs, in a.d. 640. Fourth Edition. 
 
 The CHRONOLOGY and GEOGRAPHY of ANCIENT EGYPT, 
 with Plates by Joseph Bonomi. 
 
 ALEXANDRIAN CHRONOLOGY. 
 
 The CHRONOLOGY of the BIBLE. 
 
 The HISTORY of the HEBREW NATION and its LITERATURE. 
 
 The HEBREW SCRIPTURES TRANSLATED, being a revision of 
 
 the Authorized English Old Testament. 
 
 The NEW TESTAMENT TRANSLATED from Griesbach's Text. 
 Sixth Edition. 
 
 CRITICAL NOTES on the Authorized- English Version of the New 
 Testament. Second Edition. 
 
 HISTORIC NOTES on the Boolfs of tlie Old and New Testaments. 
 Second Edition. 
 
 TEXTS from the HOLY BIBLE, explained by the Help of the Ancient 
 Monuments. Second Edition. 
 
 EGYPTIAN MYTHOLOGY and EGYPTIAN CHRISTIANITY, 
 
 with their Influence on the Opinions of Modem Christendom. 
 
THE DECEEE OF CANOPUS. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The following Inscription may be called either the Decree of 
 Canopus, from the city in which the Egyptian priests met when 
 they published it^ or the Tablet of Tanis, from the spot in which 
 it was found, and the city for which this copy was carved. It 
 was found in 1866, by Messrs. Lepsius and Weidenbach, of 
 Berlin, and Messrs. Reinisch and Roesler, of Vienna ; and each 
 party published a copy of it. The following is copied from that 
 published in Vienna by the latter gentlemen. It contains thirty- 
 seven lines of hieroglyphical writing, followed by seventy-five 
 lines of Greek — one the translation from the other. Each inscrip- 
 tion is continuous, with no breaks or spaces between the words. 
 Above the hieroglyphics is a semicircular picture of a pair of 
 outstretched wings, but without the Sun, from which these wings 
 usually spring. From the place of the Sun hang two Asps — 
 one crowned with the crown of Upper Egypt, and the other with 
 that of Lower Egypt. Between the Asps are the characters for a 
 Gift and for Life. On each side of the Asps is a sceptre, in a 
 horizontal position, which the Asps may be supposed to hold. 
 
 The stone is limestone, and, though not hard, the inscription on 
 it is uninjured. The whole, both of the hieroglyphics and the 
 Greek, is perfect. 
 
 It was happily discovered by Dr. Roesler, on publishing this 
 Decree, that the sadly mutilated fragment of a bilinguar tablet in 
 Burton^s " Excerpta Hieroglyphica,". plates 54 and 55, is a copy 
 of the same Decree. This stone is now in Paris, in the Louvre. 
 On comparing the very few characters that can be read upon it 
 
iv INTRODUCTION. 
 
 with our perfect copy, we are able to learn, first, that the two 
 Greek inscriptions probably agreed together word for word, but 
 not line for line; and secondly, that the two hieroglyphical 
 inscriptions did not agree character for character. Hence, alone, 
 we might have concluded that the Greek was the original, and 
 that the hieroglyphics were the translation. And this is what we 
 have learnt by comparing the Greek and hieroglyphics in the 
 perfect tablet. The Paris copy was originally wider than that 
 found at Tanis, but had been divided down its length, probably 
 in order to make of it two door-steps, or sills, for which, as it is 
 of hard stone, it was very suitable ; and in some such position it 
 has been very much worn. It had a more ornamental head-piece. 
 Under the winged Sun are traces of a row of several gods and 
 goddesses, and probably there was once a figure of the king 
 sacrificing to them. Beneath are thirty lines of hieroglyphics, and 
 seventy-three of Greek. The Paris copy has also the remains 
 of a third version of the Decree, in the Enchorial or common 
 letters, not given by Burton. 
 
 In the following pages the hieroglyphics are divided, with 
 spaces between the words, and every word is numbered, for the 
 convenience of referring to it in the Explanation of the hiero- 
 glyphics which follows. At the same time, the position of the 
 characters is so kept that the reader can understand how they 
 stood with regard to one another in the more crowded original. 
 The Greek is not given in the square characters of the original, 
 but in the letters usually employed in printed books. Both the 
 hieroglyphics and the Greek are divided into their original lines. 
 
 In the Explanation of the hieroglyphical words, first is given its 
 probable meaning ; then the force of its characters in Roman 
 letters ; then the Coptic word which those letters seem to represent. 
 When a word, as is usually the case, is used several times in the 
 Inscription, reference is made from one place to another. Reference 
 is also sometimes made to the Author's Vocabulary, at the 
 end of his volume entitled Egyptian Hieroglyphics. The Coptic 
 words quoted are all taken from Dr. Tattam's Lexicon jEgyp- 
 tiacum. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The two translations are placed face to face, and broken into 
 paragraphs for more convenient comparison. An Alphabet is 
 added, but it is limited to the letters used in our Inscription. 
 Both translations are as literal as possible, in order to show not 
 only how far they agree, but also how far they differ. 
 
 This Decree would have given to us the long wished-for 
 key to the knowledge of hieroglyphics, had we not already 
 obtained that knowledge by means of the Eosetta Stone, which 
 was discovered more than half a century earlier. The Kosetta 
 Stone, thanks to Dr. Young and M. Champollion, had given us 
 a knowledge of several words, and the force of a large number of 
 letters, or. syllabic characters. With this beginning, aided by 
 the art of decyphering, by the Coptic language, and by the 
 pictures which accompany many of the Egyptian inscriptions, 
 this number has been largely increased. The new acquisitiona 
 are, many of them, as certain as the knowledge gained more 
 directly from the translated inscription. Other results are of less 
 certain value ; and some of these this new discovery will enable 
 us to reject, while it confirms others with a double certainty. 
 
 The language of this tablet differs not a little from that of 
 Rosetta. In that inscription, as it would seem, the hieroglyphics 
 were the original, and the Greek a translation. But in this Decree 
 of Canopus the Greek seems to be the original, and the hierogly- 
 phics the translation. The consequence is, that in the hieroglyphics; 
 of this Decree the thoughts are expressed at far greater length — 
 that is, with the help of a far greater number of words — than in 
 the hieroglyphics of the Rosetta Stone. The Egyptian scribe, in 
 his wish to express accurately the meaning of the more exact 
 language, was forced to use a greater number of auxiliary verbs, 
 and of inflections to his verbs, than we meet with on the Rosetta 
 Stone, or is common in other inscriptions. In this way it makes 
 the Coptic language far more necessary to us, and also far more 
 useful. Again, the Egyptian scribe has made use of his priestly 
 knowledge to give the particulars of some of the rites, which are 
 mentioned by the Greek writer in only general terms ; and he has 
 given to the king his Egyptian complimentary titles, which are not 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 found in the Greek, He shows the various ranks of the priests 
 and priestesses, and the various degrees of holiness of the temples, 
 or parts of the temples. He gives to the sacred bread its name 
 of Presence-bread, the very name used in the Hebrew law for the 
 bread eaten by the priests in the Temple of Jerusalem. Thus in 
 our translations the hieroglyphic decree is much longer than the 
 Greek. The scribe has been very inexact in the use of the pre- 
 positions ; but perhaps not more so than the Coptic language 
 allows. 
 
 If a student should wish to pursue an independent inquiry, aad 
 to decypher the hieroglyphics for himself without the help, and 
 therefore without the possible mistakes, of former inquirers, he 
 should begin with a number of the names of the Egyptian kings. 
 From the most modern of those, the names of the Roman 
 emperors and of the Ptolemies, he may form an alphabet of 
 nearly one hundred characters. The recurrence of the same 
 characters in the various names will be a proof that the right force 
 has been assigned to each. 
 
 He may then begin upon this Decree, not using the translation 
 here given, but making one for himself. In doing so, the pro- 
 position is to divide the hieroglyphical inscription into various 
 groups of characters for words in such a manner, that the same 
 hieroglyphical words should correspond as nearly as possible with 
 the same Greek words in the various parts of the Decree. So 
 far as this can be done, the Greek words may be supposed to 
 be a translation of the corresponding hieroglyphics. The 
 hieroglyphical words are then to be compared with the words in 
 the Coptic Dictionary. In this way, when the Greek inscription 
 and hieroglyphic inscription are compared, if a hieroglyphical 
 word is in every case found to correspond in the sentence with the 
 same Greek word, and if also, when read by means of the alphabet, 
 it be found to bear in the Coptic language the meaning which its 
 Greek word gives to it, we may then be satisfied that we have 
 learned its real meaning. 
 
 By this appeal to the Coptic language, the student will not 
 only confirm the alphabetic force which he gained for the several 
 
INTRODUCTION. Vll 
 
 characters from the kings' names ; but he will add to his alphabet 
 many characters which are not there used. He will also learn the 
 syllabic sound of many characters which, as they contain the 
 sound of two consonants, can take no place in an alphabet. 
 
 These are the steps which the Author has pursued ; but he is 
 well aw'are that he has not in every place obtained the wished-for 
 certainty. His translation of the single words is in many cases 
 of doubtful value, and, possibly, often wrong. This arises from 
 two causes : first, the hieroglyphics are not an exact, but a free 
 rendering of the Greek Decree ; and, secondly, the language of the 
 hieroglyphics is not quite the same as the Coptic of the Dictionary, 
 which was the language of Egypt four centuries after this inscrip- 
 tion was made. If the reader takes the trouble to compare this 
 translation with that made by Dr. Lepsius, or that by Drs. 
 Keinisch and Roesler, he will find that it differs from those in the 
 force given to many of those characters which are less certainly 
 understood, because they are not used in the kings' names. It 
 also differs in its division of the continuous sentence into words, 
 and in the meaning of many of the words. But those gentlemen 
 make no appeal to the Coptic language to support their renderings ; 
 and hence we are unable to judge upon what their opinions are 
 founded. 
 
 This Decree is valuable to us for other reasons besides its help 
 to the study of hieroglyphics. It tells us of a proposal then 
 made by the priests to reform the Egyptian calendar, at least, so 
 far as it was used in fixing the days when the religious feasts were 
 to be celebrated. Ever since the year b.c. 1322, in the reign of 
 Menophra, probably the king better known as Thothmosis II., the 
 Egyptian civil year had consisted of 365 days ; and hence, for 
 want of a leap-year, the new-year's day, and the feasts then cele- 
 brated, were always moving one day earlier every four years. This 
 change, which must in every generation have been noticed, had 
 now, by the help of the Alexandrian astronomers, been determined 
 with greater exactness. The new-year's day, the 1st of Thoth, 
 which oyght to fall on the 18th of July, when the Dog Star is 
 seen to rise heliacally, had now, in the ninth year of Ptolemy 
 
vm INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Euergetes, moved nearly nine months earlier^ and fell on the 22nd 
 of October. This is well known from several observations recorded 
 by the Alexandrian astronomers; and quite agrees — at least, as 
 well as observations which depend upon eyesight and the weather 
 can be expected to agree — with the information contained in this 
 Decree, namely, that the Dog Star then rose heliacally on the 1st 
 of Payni. Calculating back from what we are told by Censorinus, 
 our great authority on the Calendar, we should have supposed that 
 was not the case till the next year, the 10th of Euergetes. The 
 very small disagreement shows with what accuracy the heliacal 
 rising of the star could be observed. However, the priests pro- 
 posed to be no longer guided by this movable civil year in the 
 arrangement of their feast days. How far their proposal was 
 acted on we do not know. The change was not made by civil 
 authority till the reign of Augustus, who first introduced the 
 Julian mode of reckoning into Alexandria, in the year B.C. 25. 
 
 This rather intricate subject will be best understood by the help 
 of the following Table, showing the Egyptian Calendar at the 
 various times at which we have occasion to consider it : — 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 IX 
 
 
 IX .d" 
 
 III 
 
 1> 
 
 ■sS 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 
 s 
 
 £ 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 ^<j 
 
 
 '-J* as 
 
 
 <M 
 
 (N 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 i 
 
 .a 
 
 b 
 
 p 
 
 i 
 
 I" 
 
 'ft 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 S =4 § o 
 
 • wo, 
 OO I 
 
 1 
 
 Ph 
 
 1 
 
 <1 
 
 Choeae. 
 . TyM. 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 PM 
 
 ^ 
 
 » 
 
 & 
 
 1 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 =2 
 
 ■SiS ft 
 O^ 9 
 
 
 J 
 o 
 
 LIJ ri-l rJ-l 
 
 !^ PH P-l 
 
 ■ft 
 
 a s 
 
 I 
 
 Season of 
 Inundation. 
 
 Season of 
 Vegetation. 
 
 Season of 
 Drought. 
 
 I t 
 
 1-a i-T> 
 
 of Inundation. of "Vegetation. 
 
 -rt 
 
 >; 
 
 -»» 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 CO 
 
 
 tH 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 T a 
 
 I 
 
 of Housing. 
 
 1- el s 
 
 I i t 
 
 i A & 
 
X INTRODUCTION. 
 
 In the first column of tte accompanying Table explaining the 
 Egyptian Calendar, we have the names of the months, together 
 with their hieroglyphical descriptions, as belonging to the several 
 seasons. 
 
 In the second column we have the three seasons of the year, each 
 divided into four months, with the days on which those seasons were 
 supposed by the Egyptians to begin, and also the days on which 
 each of the twelve months would always have begun if the 
 Egyptians had known the true length of the year, and had under- 
 stood how to regulate the civil year by the help of intercalary days. 
 
 The third column shows how, according to Gensorinus, the year 
 was arranged at the beginning of the Sothic Period, B.C. 1322, 
 called by Theon the Era of Menophra. At that time, perhaps, 
 the five additional days, called the Epagomense, were added to the 
 twelve months of thirty days each, under the belief that the year 
 consisted of 365 days, and that the months would for the future 
 remain stationary, each keeping to its own season. It will be 
 observed that the months did not then pictorially represent the 
 seasons in which they fell. Thus Thoth, which began on the 
 18th of July, when the inundation began, is pictorially the first 
 month of vegetation. Each of the months, so far as its name was 
 pictorial, was the third part of the year out of place. 
 
 Of course, with the want of an intercalary day on every fourth 
 year, the months did not remain fixed to their seasons ; and the 
 fourth column represents the Egyptian Calendar at the date of 
 this Decree, when the priests proposed to introduce the inter- 
 calary day every fourth year, and to check the wandering of the 
 months for the future. This column is confirmed by the words 
 of the Decree, which, in lines 37 and 38 of the Greek, informs us 
 that the month of Payni began with the heliacal rising of the 
 Dog Star, and with the beginning of the Nile's overflow — that is 
 to say, about the 18th of July. 
 
 The praiseworthy wish of the priests was, however, not carried 
 into efi"ect. The intercalary day was not introduced into the 
 calendar, and the civil New-year's day continued to wander 
 through the seasons. Our fifth column represents the civil year 
 
INTEODUCTION, xi 
 
 in the year B.C. 25, when Augustus enforced the wishes of 
 Julius Caesar in Alexandria, and introduced the system of inter- 
 calating one day every four years. From that time forward the 
 Alexandrian year ceased to be movable. It began on the 29th 
 of August j while the Egyptian year continued to wander round 
 the seasons as before. 
 
 The last three columns in our Table are again and again 
 confirmed by records of the astronomical observations in the 
 writings of Claudius Ptolemy, and Theoii. For the Alex- 
 andrian astronomers, following in the steps of their Baby- 
 lonian brethren, always made use of the movable year of 365 
 days, which was much more certain to be hereafter understood 
 than the new Julian year, which, having been made by the edict 
 of one emperor, might easily be altered by another. 
 
 Our Decree is dated the 9th year of Euergetes, or B.C. 238 ; 
 and C. Ptolemy has preserved for us two astronomical records of 
 about that time, which satisfactorily prove when the Egyptian 
 months began, and also when the Macedonian month Apellseus 
 began. In the year b.c. 244, the 5th of Apellseus was the 
 27th of Thoth ; or Apelleeus began on 23rd of Thoth, our 1 4th of 
 November. Eight years later, in the year b.c. 236, the 14th of 
 Dius was the 9th of Thoth, and Apellaeus, the next month, began 
 on the 26th of Thoth, our 15th of November. The difference of 
 the one day is not easily explained, because of the uncertainty as 
 to the intercalation in the Macedonian year, which need not here 
 be entered upon. 
 
 The above records also show that in the year B.C. 244, Thoth 
 began on the 23rd of October, and that in the year b.c. 236, it 
 began on the 21st of October, very exactly confirming our fourth 
 column, where, in the year B.C. 238, the 1st of Thoth is placed 
 on the 22nd of October ; and also confirming those words of the 
 Decree, which place the 1st of Payni about the 19th July. 
 
 If we now, with this knowledge, turn to the date of the Decree, 
 we shall find that the priests, by the month of Tybi, mean, not 
 the Tybi of the civil year then in use, which began on the 19th of 
 February, but the Tybi of the reformed Calendar which they are 
 
XU INTfiODTJCTlON. 
 
 thus proposing to introduce. The first line of our Decree makes 
 Tybi begin ten days before Apellseus, that is, in some time in 
 November. It would not be easy to say exactly what day of 
 November the priests would then place the 1st of Tybi, from 
 the uncertainty, as before remarked, in the intercalation of the 
 Macedonian year; but it is clear that they proposed that Tybi 
 should stand very nearly as it does in our third column, when 
 Thoth began with the rising of the Dog Star, as arranged at the 
 Era of Menophra. In the date of the Decree, the month Tybi is 
 clearly not that in our fourth column, the civil year then in use, 
 but that in our third column, the civil year of Menophra, 
 B.C. 1323, and of a.d. 138, when, after the lapse of four times 
 365 years, the Egyptian New-year's day had again returned to its 
 original place in the natural year. 
 
Plate I. lines 1--8. 
 
 DECREE OF CANOPUS. 
 
 ./'.6.5. 4 . 3 .2.1. 
 
 I « 1 1 C~3 S I • i I Oi 
 
 < ' ' 
 
 18 ■*■ 
 
 3<> 
 
 Si • 31 .SO.i9.a6.XY. JS 
 
 A/y\^/\ 
 
 wm ^j + II t M mm 
 
 6 
 I !« . . 14 . IS . la . «t . to 
 
 IS 
 
V.i,«3-5. DECREE or CAN OPUS. Plate 2. 
 
 . ia .* 11 . 10 . 9 . 8 . 7 . 6 . 
 
 ini tt M rrnm fu ^r 
 
 19 . 18 . 1/ , 16 . 15 , 14 . iS 
 
 U^ ^1 V 4. T- •?; tfi/nr 
 
 28. 27 . 26 . i3 . ^4 . 23 . JJ . 81 . 20 . 
 
 ,10. 9 .. r . 6.4.3.a.i. ae 
 
 8 »5i 
 
 20 . 19 . )» f 17 . 16 . 13 . 14 . . la . 11 . 
 
 13 
 »1 • SO . 2.9 . Ig. 27 . 2? . as . 12. ai. 
 
 >• . 37 . as . 35 . 34. 33 . 31 . 
 
 . 11. II . .9.8. 7 . S^ .3.4 .3.1.1, 
 
 • 21 . JO . 10 . 18 . IT . 16 . 15 . . 13 . 
 
 14 
 . 18 . 27 . 26 . 15 . .53.' 11 
 
 14 
 J 40 .39.38. Ji7 . 36 . 33 . 34 .33.33. 31 .30. jg 
 
Plates. DECREE OF CANOPUS. ]i,i«s«-8. 
 
 3 .2.1. 
 
 6. 
 
 . 18 . ir . 16 . 15 . 14 . IS. la . n . 10. 9 .8 
 
 19 
 
 . 27 . 2fi , ZS.XA.2i.ii.. 21 . %0 . 
 
 "A A Vl^r fr. .3 S if W.l 
 
 34 . as . 32 , 31 . &0 . 29 . 28 . 
 
 /f s^. ^ If] ,^- ^^ AS 
 
 . 10.9, 8.7.6 . 3 , 4 .8.2. 1 
 
 19 .18. 17 16 18 . t« . JJ . 11 , 
 
 28 . 27 . 26 . ZJ , SI . 2S . . 21 . 2o . 
 
 33 . 5a . 51 . 30 I is 
 
 6 
 
 IB .17 . 1« . 1* . 14 . IS . la . Jl . 10 . 
 
 .28. ar . 26 . iS , i4 . -as . ;22 . 21 . JO . 19 
 
 ■*" § " !U tg S ffl 2 ^«® 
 
 it 
 36 . 35 . 33 . 5a . 51 . 30 I %9 
 
 34 
 
 .» . 8 .7 
 
lines 8-u DECREE OF CAN OPUS. Plate 4. 
 
 .40.^9 . 38 . 37 , 36 . SS .34 .,?3 . S2 , 31 . aO .29. 
 
 . 21 . . 10 . . 17 . 16 . IS. 14 . lA I 12 . 11. 10 . 
 
 XO 18 
 
 . il . 30 . . X* , 17 . Z« - . A4: . 53 . ia 
 
 Jtf 95 
 
 . .45. 13 . 42 . 40. 38 . 37 . 36 , as . 34 .33. 32. 
 
 11. lO .i. -7.6.5.4.3.2.1. 
 
 Z$ . -Ji . Ji. aO . 19 . 18 . 17 I IS . 13 . . 13 , iZ 
 
 It 
 36 . 35 . 34 . .31. 30. 30 . .28 . 27 . . .15 . 24. 
 
 vtm t it' i^v* Wei II g: zj't ? 
 
 Si ae 
 
 -le . 45 . 44 . « . 4* . 41 .40. .38. 37 
 
 . 11 I 10 . • . 8 . . S . ,5.4. 3 . i , 1 . 46 
 
 . 11 . 2P . 19 .18 .17. IG . IS . 14 . IS , U 
 
Plates. DECREE OF CANOPUS. ]meslt-J4, 
 
 31 . SI . 30 . ^8 . 27 .26. 25 . 24 ,28.22 
 
 iSS) I'X + KB jlillE) * i 1' 
 
 • n . 10 .9,8. r .6.5.4.. 1 
 
 s 
 
 . ii . 22 . 21. SO . 18 . 18 . 17 . ie . ta . f 
 
 i 
 
 13 
 
 aa .31 .40. 29 . as . 97 . 23 .Z4. 
 
 X^ ^m atata I I lA Fill I JIJH. r '"'•^^ I 
 
 ;l 41 . 40 . S9 . 48 .ST . S6 . S5 , 54 . 33. 
 
 77 ^liT * t'^f ^' t ItRf V I? 
 
 .12. 11 . 10. 8 . 7 . 6 . S . 4 . 3 . X . 1. 
 
 13. 
 
 .2s. 24 . as . aa . 21 I 10 , 18 . n . le . IS . 14 . 13 
 
 IS 
 . S7 . SS.34.8S, S5. , 31 .30. SS . A8 .47.56. 
 
 3 8 ,J6 
 
 .46 . 48 . 4T . 46. 4S • « ■ *S . -iZ . 41 . 40 . Sfl . 
 
 10 .9. 8 .T.6.5.4 .3.J2.1. 
 
lines ii-j8, DECREE OF CANOPUS. Fkte6. 
 
 .22 . Si . 20 . IC . 18 . ir . 16 . 15. 14 .18. la. 11 . 
 .Sa . 51 . 30 . 29 . is, . XT . ZC . ii . 14 ,SS. 
 
 . 42 . 41 . . 39 . 38 . 37 36 . 35 . 54 . 33 . 
 
 !t / "^ ^1 s vn «^ ^ -* y« 
 
 40 
 
 9 
 I aO . 19 . 18 . 17 . 15 . 14 . 13 . 12 . IJ . 10. 
 
 10 
 
 . so . 26 , , a? , ae . xs . 24 . xs . 22 . zi , 
 
 ^ ' f — !<=> <:^Jl TTTin k' V^ 
 
 42 . 41 . 40 . 69 . 37 . 36 . 39 . 34 35 . 3i , 
 . 11. 10. 9.8.7, 6 . 3 .4. 3 Z .1, 
 , .23 . 52. 21 . 20. 10 , 18 . 17 , 16 . 15 . 14 . 13 . 12 
 
 , . 34. as . aa . so . i» . is . 27 . 5(5 . is 
 
 3.5 31 " l-JU-J 
 
 .49 . 48 . 47 . , 43 I 44 . 43 , 42 .41 .40. 30 . 38 &7 
 
 
Plate?. DECREE OF CANOPUS. linesn-m 
 
 . IS . 12 . 11 . 10 . B . T . S . s . 4- . 3 . 1 . 1 . 
 
 8 
 
 , a* , AS . ai . Ai . aa , 19 . is . i? . le . is.tt 
 
 .38 , S2 . 31 . 80 . ^e . 28 , 27 . 26 . 25, 
 
 48 12 . 41 . 40 .as -Sa. 37 36 . 35 34 
 
 .22 ■. 31 . 20 , je . 16 . 17 . 10 , IS . 14 . 13 . . 11 . 10 . 
 ,3a 32 . . 30 . 2 9 . 2S . 27 . as 25 I 24 .JS. 
 
 V ® ^"^ is lii ;i ^ s/-/^ 7 ! 
 
 31 
 .4-7.46. 45.43. 4i . 41 40. 39 . 88. 37 S6 . 35.84. 
 
 44 
 
 4 a 
 
 .41 . 2.0 . Id .18. . 16 . . 14 . IS . 11 . U . 10 . 
 
 17 15 
 
 .34 . 3S . 5i . 31 . 30 28 . 28 . ,?7 . . 25 . 24. 23 . 12 . 
 
lines lS-22. DECREE OF CANOPUS, Plate 8. 
 
 .44 .13 4S , 41 . 3tf . . 3T . 36 . 33 
 
 40 as 
 
 . 13 . 19 . 11 . 10 . 9 . . r . ,5 4 . S , 2. . 1 . 
 
 8 6 
 
 tS, . Jil . 20 , 10 . 18 . IT 16. 1* . 14. 
 
 a J . ai .80, 20 . 18 . i7 I 56 . £5 . i?4 . aa . 
 
 . 42 . 41 . 40 . SO . .37 36 . 35 . »4 . 88. 
 
 38 
 
 . la . u . 10 . 9 . s . . 6 . ;s . 4 . 3 . . 1 . 
 
 5^ J 2 ® -* "^ si :r| 'JR^ «■ 
 
 7 5 
 
 . 16 . JS . . 13 . . SI .ao. 10 . 18 . IT. 16 . 13. 14 . 13 . 
 
 'Ar^lirUMAB^'t 
 
 . 39 . . 37 . 30 . 35 . 34 . S8 . 32 . 31 . iO . 3% . 37. 
 
 38 20 
 
 .SI. ,49 . 48 . 47 . 46 , 43 . 44 , 48 . . 41 . 40 , 
 
 so 42 
 
 aa . li . .9.8. T . 6 . 5 . 4.3 . 3. . 1 .« 
 
 10 
 
 . 54 , . 52 . 21 , »0 . 19 . 16 . 17 . 16 . IS . 14 . 19 . 
 a« "T' R 1. ^«. '*W![ /,«wv X CL y(« »un IT 
 
Plate 9. DECREE OF CANOPUS. lines 25-25. 
 
 .ar . 36 . as . 3-i . as . 32 . ai . .29. 5a . 27 , se. sj. 
 
 30 
 
 . 5C , 49 . 4H . -17 . .45 . 44 . 43 . 41 , 41 . 40 . 39 . 
 
 46 
 
 . 12 . 11 . . fl . 8 . , e 3,4.3.2 I . 
 
 10 7 
 
 ?e , . S4 I *3 , . 21 . 20 , 19 . 18 . 17 . 16 . 13 . 13 . 
 
 9* .2.2 14 
 
 S» . 97 , $« . 84 , 33 .J2. SI . 30 .29. 3S . 
 
 33 
 , 47 , iS . IS , ,4», 42 . 41 . 40 . 8!) , 
 
 . 10 . 9 . 8 . 7 .6.3,4.2.1. 
 
 11 3 
 
 • 19 . 18 , JT , 16 . 15 . 14 . 13 . la . 
 
 ,n . ai .so. . 28 , . 26 . , 24 J?3 . J2i . 21 . 20 
 
 29 ar 2J »-»"- 
 
 .43 . 43... 11 . , ae . 38 . 3T . 36 . S9 . 34 .33. 
 
 40 
 
 •S' 7 .6.3. 4. 3, 2.1. 
 
 40 
 
lines 25-57, DECREE OF CANOPUS. Plate to. 
 
 . ax . , 20 . 19 . 18 , 17 . 16 . IS . 14 . 13 . la. . 
 
 21 
 . S4 .33 .32. . 31 , 30 .S9. a8 . 27 \ 26 . 25 . 21 . 23 . 
 
 47 .46 , 46 . -14 . .4a .41 . . 39 , 38 .86 3.5. 
 
 43 40 37 
 
 .16 .13 14 . 1.? . la . n . 10 . 9 . 8 . 7 . 
 
 . S7 . S.S . 25 . 24 . 23 . Si , 31 , 20 . 19 . 1 B ,17. 
 
 c^ u -^j '^^ -Fir \2 f ^ I ^\ 
 
 . 38 . sr . 36 . 35 . 34 . 33 . 32 . 31 . , .29 . 2 8 . 
 
 .50 
 
 ^^ 8 
 
 19 . 18 , ir . 16 . 15 . 14 . isi . la j 11 
 .rt . 36 , .as . a* . a§ - 22 . 21 , 20 
 
 . 37 . 36 . 38 . 31 , 33 . 32 . 31 28 . 58 
 
 5 
 
Plate 11. DECREE OF CAN OPUS. hnesss-so. 
 
 , , . IZ . .10. 9 8. 7. .5. 4 .3.5 .1. 
 
 ^1 ^ (s-^F^ .if. -^ f ■ ? '«- 
 
 14 13 il 6 
 
 .32 .31 . 00 . , 38 . ,26 .il . . 22 .21 . . 10 . .17 . 16 .15. 
 
 a« 27 25 23 20 16 
 
 44 . 43 . 42 . .40 . 39 . .Sr . 36 I 35 . .^4 . 33 . 
 
 41 38 
 
 ■ S'l ■ 5S . 52 . . 50 49 . .47 . . 45 , 
 
 .51 4& 4« 
 
 ■ la ■ n . 10 . 9 , . r . s . 5 . 4.3.5.1. 
 
 8 
 •23. as .2) 20 , 19 , 18 . 17 . IS .IS .13 
 
 Se 28 27 . 26 . 26 . 24 
 
 i = L:rvL?r!r/:i 
 
 39 ,38 37 . 36 . 38 . 34 . 
 
 4-0 
 • l<>.9.8.r.e.5.4. 3 X 1 
 
 .19 . 18 . 17 . 16 . ,15 14 , la 12 Ij 
 
 . a4 . as . .31 . -29 .28 .27. 26 . as . 21 .23. 22 , 21 20 
 
 11 
 
 .33. 82 . 31 . 30 29 28 27 . 26 . 26 . J4 
 
 ■ 43 ■ 4a . 41 . . 39 , 38 37 . 36 . 38 . 34 . 
 
 32 30 
 
lines 30-33. DECREE OF CANOPUS. PktelS. 
 
 •12 . 41 . 40 . 39 . . 37 3fi . gS , 
 
 3B 
 , 13 . 12 . 11 . 10 .9.8,7. 6 . 5 I 4 . 3 .2,1, 
 
 .23 , 25 . ^1 . 50 . 19 . . ir . iO . 15 . It , 
 
 31 . 30 . 2^ . .28 . S7 . 26 . .23. 24 , 
 
 4b. 44 ,43.42. 41. - 40 . 39 . ."JS , 37 .36. 3S . 34 .3S. 32. 
 
 .iS. 15 . .10.9. 8 .7 .6. .4. .3 ..2.1. 4-5 
 
 T ^BD^-* I'fe" %ir ^1^ ^ ; 1/ =. 
 
 11 5 
 
 .24 . 23 . J2 . 21 . 50 . 19 I 18 .17. 16 . 15 . 14 . 
 
 .35 . 34 . 33 . 32 . 31 . 30 . 29 . 28 . 27 26 25 
 
 43 . 4i. 4.'5 .42,. , 4l 40. 39 .38. 37.36. 
 
 12 , 11 . 10 . 9 . 8 . 7 I 6 . 5. 4: . 3 . .2 . 1 
 
 24 . 23, , 22 . 21 . 20 . 19 . 18 . 17 . 16 . 15 . 14 . 13 . 
 
Plate 13. DECREE OF CANOPUS. lines 33-86. 
 
 i 35 ai . 33 .41.31. 30 . i8 . 27 . 26 25 
 
 . 44 .43 .42,. 41 . 40 . . 38 . 37.3a. 
 
 id 
 .14 . 13 . 12 . ]j . . 9 . 8 r . e , 5 . -t- , 3 , , 1 . 
 
 la 2 
 
 . ae . 25 . J24 .23. 22 . j21 . 20 19 .18 17 . J6 15 
 
 40 .39 , ie . ^r . 36 ,45.34 . 53 . .31 3 .39. 28 37. 
 52 '.51 . !)0 . 49 . 49 . ^7 . 46 . 46 , 44 . 43 1 4J , 41 . 
 
 .18 . 17 . 16 15 . 14 . 13 . 12 . 11 . 10 . 9 .8 
 
 28 27 26 .25 24 . 23 . 22 • 21 . 20. 19 
 
 .39 . 38 . 37 , .3,7 . 34 . 33 . S2 . 31 . 30 . 29 . 
 
 36 
 .11. 10 . 9 . .7.6.5.4.3, 2 1 
 
lines3G,S7. DECREE OF CANOPUS. Plate w. 
 
 .16 . ir . .15 . 14 I 13 . ia, 
 
 16 
 
 .36 . 25 . 24 . 2S . 32 . 21 SO . JP . 
 
 . 84 . .33 . 32- . 31 . 30. 20 . 28 . IT. 
 
 (Mt T ^"f Sr ? iir« t if- 
 
 :iS . 12, 11 , 10 . 9 . 8 . T . 6 . 6 . 3.2,1. 
 
 .24 . 2.^ . 22 . 21 .20. 19 . IB . 1^ . 18 . 15 . 14. 
 
 s ;^u ^^ tail Iff s5ffi" 
 
 .36 34 , 34 . 33 . as. . .30 29 . .28 . 27 .26. 25 , 
 
 31 
 48 . 47 . 46 . 43 . 44 . 43 . 42 . 41 . 40 .39. 38 .37. 
 
PUte 10. 
 
 2 1. 
 
 ALPHABET. 
 
 '' « 5 4 S 
 
 v-^ L^ L^ m n r r 
 
 4 3 2 1 
 
 M I rr // <s> Ej,.r 
 
 10 9 
 
 e s 
 
 ''■55 
 
 '* 1* «3 12 1, 
 
 f 
 
 0,17. 
 
 000 
 
 I I i 
 
 
 10 8 8 
 
 8 7 8 5*32 
 
 B,F,V 
 ^ ^ © e © K,CH,G 
 
 ■^ 6 5 4 3 a 1 
 
 e « 4 
 
 10 9 
 
 M. 
 
Plate 1§, 
 
 ALPHABET. 
 
 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 i 
 
 ^ •i^ ♦ ^ i dV — .v.,^ 
 
 13 32 11 10 ■ 
 
 - V t r^j 
 
 6 5 4 3 2, 
 
 # ^ ^ B t^ J5IC 
 
 ^0 9 6766432 1 
 
 15 14 IS la ji 
 
 N. 
 
 P,PH. 
 
 S,SH. 
 
 & r 
 
 r 
 
 a 1 
 
 ▲ A 
 
 1''' 16 IS 14 13 12 n 10 9 
 
 ^"^ * *^ ^^Hi* « a o o o o 
 
 ■?■_ 6 5 4 3 2 1 
 
 1 O ><:>o 
 
 >t,th: 
 
 H,TK 
 
 100 10 5 3 2 1 
 
 ^ n _>^ III JJ I Numerals. 
 
DECKEE OF CANOPUS. 
 
 Lines 1 — 10.] 
 
 1 ^aatXevoPTOs UroXefiaiov tov UroXe/iaiov Kai Apcrivorjs, 
 Oecov ABe\<p(ov, erovs evarov, e<f> lepeas A-ttoXXcovlSov tov 
 
 2 Moo-p^tmyos AXe^avSpov /cat Oecov ASeX(f}av /cat decov 
 Evepjerccv, KaV7](j}Opov Apaivoijs ^iXaBeX(f>ov Meve/cpareias 
 
 3 Tijs ^iXafji/jiovos, firjvos AireXXaoov 6/3So/t7?, AtyvTmcov Be 
 TuySt eTTTaKaiheKaTTj. — '^ijcfuafoa. — Oi ap-^iepeis 
 
 4 Kai Trpo<^7)Tai Kai oi eis to uSvtov eieriropevofievoi irpos tov 
 (JToXia'fiov Tojv Oecov Kai TTTepocfiopai, Kai lepoypa/MfMUTeis Kai 
 
 5 01 aXXoi tepeis ot, crvvavTrjaavres e/c tccv KUTa Tfjv ')(wpav 
 lepmv eis ttjv Tre/MTTTTjv tov Aiov, ev y ajeTai Ta jeveOXia tov 
 
 ^aaiXeas, Kai eis tt/v TrefiirTijv Kai eiKaBa tov avTov fiTjvos, 
 ev rj trapeXa^ev ttjv ^aaiXeiav irapa tov iraTpos, crvv- 
 eSpevaavTes 
 
 7 TavTTj tt; rj/j,epa ev Ta ev K.avo)Tra) iepa> Tcav ^vepjeTuiv 
 Oecov ei-rrav " ETretSi; ^acriXevs UToXefjiaios IlToXefiaiov Kai 
 ApaivoTjs, Oecov ASeT^cov, 
 
 8 Kai /3acriXicraa ^epeviKT), 17 aBeX<f>7j avTOV Kai jvvt], Oeoi 
 ^vepyeTai, SiaTeXovaiv iroXXa Kai fiejaXa evepyeTovvTes Ta 
 KaTa TTjv ■^copav lepa Kai 
 
 9 Tas Tifias Tcov Oecov eiri irXeov av^ovTes, tov re Airios Kai 
 TOV M.V7JV10S Kai TCOV Xoiircov evXojifjbcov lepcov ^cocov tcov ev 
 
 10 einiieXeiav Sia ttuvtos •jroiovvTai fieTa fieyaXij? SaTravrjs Kai 
 ^oprjjias Kai Ta e^evey)(0evTa eK t7]s xcopas lepa ayaXfxaTa 
 
 VTTO 
 
 B 
 
! Dr.CKEE OF CANOPUS. [LINES 11 — 21. 
 
 1 1 TOiv liepcrtov e^crrpaTeva-as 6 ^aaiXevs aveaqiaev eis AijWTOv 
 KUi awe^wKev eis Ta lepa, 66ev eKaa-rov e^ apxvs e^VX^V, 
 T-rji; re 
 
 1 2 p^topai' ev eipTjvj] BtareTTjpTjKev, TrpoiroXe/Mwv virep avTijs irpost 
 TToWa edvrj Kai tovs ev avrois Swaarevovras, Kai, rois ev 
 
 Tj) xo>P<} 
 
 13 Traaiv Kai tols aXKois tois vtto Tqv avrcov ^aavXeiav 
 Taaaofievois Tiqv evvofiiav irapexovaiv, tov re •!roTa/j,ov irore 
 eWtTreijTepov ava- 
 
 14 0avTOs KUi iravTOiv tcov ev ttj %<B/3a KaTaTreTrXrjjfievav eiri 
 T(p <TV/jL^el3riK0Ti, Kai evdvfiovfievcov rirjv jeyevrjfiev'rjv 
 Kara^dopav 
 
 15 e-TTi Tivwv TCOV "TTpoTepov ^e^acTiKevKOTUV, e<f) a>v arvve^r] 
 a^poxi-ais irepiireTTTaKevai tovs rrjv p^cojoai' KaToiKOVvras, 
 TrpocTTavTes KTjBefio- 
 
 16 VIK039 TCOV re ev tois lepois Kai tcov aWcov tcov ttjv ^wpai/ 
 KaToiKovvTcov TToWa fj,ev irpovoTjOevTes, ovk oXiyas Be tcov 
 irpocroBcuv virep- 
 
 17 iBovTes eveKU rrjs tcov avOpcoircov acoTTjpias, eK re ZiVpias Kai 
 ^oiviKTjs Kai Kvirpov Kai e^ aXkeov TfKeiovcov tottcov ctitov 
 fieraTre/j, - 
 
 18 ■\lrafj,evoi eis ttjv X'^P'^^ Tificov fjiei^ovcov, Bieacpcrav tovs tt/V 
 AiyvrrTov KaToiKovvras, adavarov evepjecriav Kai ttjs avTcov 
 apeTfjs 
 
 19 fXejicTTOV vTToiJtVrjiia KaTa\enrovTes tois re vvv ovcriv Kai tois 
 eTTijivofxevoiS) av6 cov oi deoi BeBcoKaaiv avTois evcTTaffovaav 
 Trjv ^acriXet- 
 
 20 av Kai Bcoaovcriv raW ajada iravTa eis tov aei XP°^°v' — 
 K'^aOrj Tvxil ' — ^eBox^ai tois Kara ttjv ^jjjto/jai" tepewcrtj/ Tas 
 re •Trpovirap-^ovcras 
 
 21 TijJias ev TOIS lepois ^aaiXei TiToXefJiaicp Kai ^acriXicrcrrj 
 ^epeviKrj, Oeois ^vepjerais, Kai tois jovevcriv avTcov, Oeois 
 A-BeXc^ois, Kai Tois irpoyovois, 
 
Links 22—32.] DECHEE OF CANOPUS. 3 
 
 33 ueois 'ZcoTTjpa-iv, av^eiv Kat tovs lepeis tovs ev i/caar^ ra>v 
 
 Kara rrjv '^(aipav lepcov irpocrovofia^eaOai, lepeis Kao twv 
 
 ^vepjercop decov Kai evypatpe- 
 Zo (TOai ev iraaiv rots '^pTj/MaToafiois Kai ev tois BaKTvXiois, 
 
 ovs <jiopov(Tiv, wpoae'yKoXaTTreaOai Kai ttjv leptacrvvrjv tcov 
 
 Evepjermv Oecov irpocrairoheiyOrj- 
 <.4 vai he irpos Tais vvv vTrapj(ovaais Teaaapcri <pvkats rov 
 
 ttXtjOovs tccv lepemv tcov ev eKacrrq) lepcp Kai, aWrjv, rj 
 
 irpoaovofjLacrdrjcreTai ire/j,- 
 
 25 TTTT] <f>vXri 7U)v Evepyercov Oecov, eirei Kai aw rtj ayadrj tv^tj 
 Kai T7]v jeveaiv ^aaiXews TlTdXefiaiov tov twv Oemv ASeXtpcav 
 (TVfi^e^TjKev 
 
 26 yeveaOai ttj Tj-efnrrrj tov Aiov, r] Kai ttoXXcov ayadcov 
 ap^rjyeTov ev iracriv avOpcoirois' eis Se tijv (pvXrjv TavTi]v 
 KUTaXe'X^drjvai tovs airo 
 
 27 TOV TrpcoTov eTovs yeyevTj/jievovs lepeis Kai tovs "TrpoaKarayr]- 
 aofievovs ecos prjvos iAeaoprj rou ev rep evaTcp erei Kai tovs 
 Tovreov eKyovovs eis tov aei 
 
 28 ')(povov. TOVS Se •7rpovirap')(^ovTas lepeis eas tov TrpcoTov eTOvs 
 eivai ojsavTCOs ev rais avTais <j>v\ats, ev ais irporepov rjcrav, 
 as Be Kai tovs 
 
 29 eKyovovs avTcov a-rro tov vvv KaTa-^copi^eaOai eis Tas avTas 
 (pvXas, ev ais oi Trarepes eiaiv' avTi Be tcov eiKoai ^ovXevTcov 
 lepecov TCOV vvv aipov/j,evcov 
 
 30 KaT eviavTOV eK tcov irpovirap'^ovcrcov Teacrapcov (f>vXcov, e^ 
 o)v TrevTe a<p eKacrTtjs ^vXijs Xafi^avovTai, eiKocri Kai irevTe 
 TOVS ^ovXevTUS 
 
 31 iepeis eivai, TrposXa/ji^avofievcov eK Trjs -Tre/iTrTTjs cpvXrjs tcov 
 EvepyeTcov Oecov aXXcov Trevre' p-eTej^eiv Be Kai tovs eK ttjs 
 •jrefjnrTijs 
 
 32 AvXrjs TCOV EvepyeTcov Oecov tcov ayveicov Kai tcov aXXcov 
 diravTcov tcov ev tois lepois Kai (fivXap'^ov avTfjs eivai KaO^ a 
 Kai em tcov aXXeov recr- 
 
 B 2 
 
I: DECREE OF CANOPUS. [LiHES 33—43. 
 
 33 aaowv ^vkcov vvapvei' kul eTretSij KaO iKacTTOV firjva ajovrai 
 ev Tois lepois eoprai tcov "EivepyeTcov Beccv Kara to irporepov 
 ■\]r7j(pi(TfJ,a 
 
 34 7] Te Tre/MTTTr) kul t^ evuTTj Kai -q ireivm-t] env eiKuBi, tois tb 
 aXXois p,€ji(7Toi,s 6eois kwt eviavTOV avvTsKovvTai eopTai Kai 
 iravTjyvpeis SrjfjLore- 
 
 35 Xets, ajeaOai Km eviavTov iravrjyvpiv STifioTeXij ev re rots 
 lepois Kai KaO oXrjv ttjv -^eopav ^aaiXei UToXefiaia Kai 
 ^aaiKiacrri ^epeviKjj, 
 
 3f) Oeois EvepjeTais, tt] rjfiepa, ei> jj eiriTeWei to aaTpov to ttjs 
 laios, 7] vofii^erai Sia tcov leptov jpa/^fiaTcov veov eTos eivai' 
 ajeTai he vvv, ev T(p 
 
 37 evaTW 6T6t, vovyi,'r\via tov Tiavvi firjvos, ev w Kai ra fjiiKpa 
 Bov^aaTia Kai Ta fieydXa ^ov^acnia ayeTai Kai tj avvayayr) 
 T(ov Kapirmv Kai rj tov 
 
 38 TTOTafiov ava^acTis yiveTai' eav Be Kai avfi^aivr) t7)v 
 eiriToXTjv tov aaTpov fieTa^aiveiv eis eTepav rjfiepav Sia 
 Teaaapav eTcov, fir] /j,eTaTi- 
 
 39 OeaOai ttjv 'iravrjyvpiv, aW ayeaQai tt) vovjjLrjviq, tov Ylavvi, 
 ev rj Kai ef ap^ijs VX^V ^^ "^9 sTei, Kai avvTeXeiv avTrjv evrt 
 r]fj,epas 
 
 40 irevTe fiSTa aTe^avrj<popias Kai Ovaiccv Kai cr-jrovhaiv Kai t(ov 
 aXXwv TCOV TrpoaTjKOVTcav' oirws Se Kai ai apai to KaOrjKOV 
 iToiwa-i hia iravTos KaTa Tr)v vvv 
 
 41 Karaaraaiv tov Koafiov Kai fir] crvfi^aivr) Tivas twv hrjfioTeXmv 
 iopTcov TCOV ayofievcov ev tco y^eifiovi ayeadai iroTe ev tco 
 depei, Tov aaTpou 
 
 42 fieTa^aivovTos fiiav rjfiepav Sia leaaapcov eTcov, eTepas Be 
 TCOV vvv ayofievcov ev tco Oepei ayeaOai ev tco yeifiovi ev tois 
 fieTa TavTa Kaipois, Kadairep Trpo- 
 
 43 Tepov Te avfi^e^TfKev yeveadai kuvvv aveyivero, ttjs crvvraPecos 
 TOV eviavTOV fievovcrrfs eK tcov TpiaKoaicov Kai e^r]KOVTa 
 tjfiepcov Kai TCOV vaTepov irpos- 
 
Lines 44—54.] DECREE OF CANOPUS. F> 
 
 44 vofiia-deia-QJV eTrayecrdai irevre rjfiepav, airo rov vvv fiMv 
 
 rjfiepav eoprrjv rwv Evepyerayv 0ewv eirayea-ffai Bia reaaapav 
 
 ertov eiri rais irevre rats 
 4o e-rrayofievaLs irpo rov veov erovs, oircos diravTes eiSaxriv, Siori 
 
 TO eWetTTOv irpOTepov irepi Tr)v avvTu^iv rwv wptov kul tov 
 
 evtavTov, Kat rcav vofii^o- 
 
 46 fievav Trepi, tijv oXrjv BiaKoa-firjcnv tov ttoXov BicopOaadat Kat 
 ava-TreTrXrjpaya-Oai, erv/M^e^TjKev Sia tccv ^vepjermv Oemv Kat 
 eTreiSr] ttjv e/c ^acriXecos UroXejjiatov 
 
 47 Kat ^aatXtacrrjs ^epeviKr}9, Oewv ^vepyeraiv, yey evrjfievrjv 
 dvyaiepa Kat ovofiaa-detaav IBepeviKijv, rj Kat ^aatXtacra 
 evdecos a'irehet')(j9rj, a-vve^r] TavTJjv irapOevov 
 
 48 cos av e^atipvris fiereXOeiv eis rov aevaov Koajiov ert 
 evhrjfiovvTuv irapa ra> ^aatXet tcov sk ttjs vtopas 
 irapayivofi.evcov irpos avrov Kar eviavTov lepecov, 
 
 49 ot fteya irevOos eirt t&j a-vn^e^rjKort evdecos avveTeXecrav 
 a^icocravres re tov ^aaiXea Kat Trjv ^aaCKtcraav eiretcrav 
 KadtSpvaai Trjv deav fiera rov Ocripios ev Tcp 
 
 50 ev Kai/tBTToo lepco, 6 ov fiovov ev Tots TrpcoTots tepois bcttiv, 
 aX\a Kat viro tov ^acrtXecos Kat tcov KaTa ttiv ■^copav iravTcov 
 ev Tots fiaXtc7Ta Ttfico/jtevots virap-^et' 
 
 51 Kat rj avaycoyr) tov tepov irXoiov tov Oaetpios ets tovto to 
 tepov KaT evtavTov ytverat eK tov ev tco HpaKXetq) tepov tji 
 evaTT) Kat eiKaSt tov Xota^, tcov tov Bpofiov 
 
 52 TCOV tepcov iravTcov Ovcrtas crvvTeXovvTcov eTrt tcov tBpvfievcov 
 VTT avTcov ^cojMcov VTrep eKacTTOV lepov tcov irpcoTcov ef 
 afi^oTepcov tcov fiepcov tov Bpofj-oV 
 
 53 jjteTa Se TavTa irpos tijv eKOecocrtv avTrjs vofitfia Kat ttjv tov 
 •KevOovs airoXvcTtv airetcoKav /xeyaXoirpeTrcos Kat KrjBe/iovtKcos 
 KadaTrep eTTt tm Airtt 
 
 54 Kat Mz/ijutet, ots fjtev evecrTtv ytveadat. AeSo')(^6at crvvTeXetv 
 T7) eK TCOV ^vepyeTcov decov yey evrj/jtevy, ^acrtXtaay, 'RepeviKy, 
 Ttfias atBtovs ev divaa-t tcov 
 
i DECREE 01' CANOPUS. [LiNES 55-65. 
 
 55 Kara ri)v "X/opav lepois' Kai eTreu ets deovs fieTTjXdeu ev tm 
 TuySt (jbt^vi, ev mirep km t] rov 'HXtou dvyarrjp ev apxy 
 fierqWa^ev rov ^tov, rjV 6 iraTrip arrjcras ovo- 
 
 56 uaa-ev ore fiev PaaiKeiav ore opaatv avrov, Kat, ayova-iv 
 avTi) eopTfjv Kat irepnrXovv ev ifKeiocnv lepois rav irpcoTWV 
 ev TOVTO) TO) fiTjvi ev (p 7] aTTodewcris avrrjs 
 
 57 ev apxv eyevTjOr], o-vvTeXeiv Kai ^aaikicra-rj 'BepevtKr) rrj eK 
 ra>v ^vepyeTOJV O.ecov ev airacri rois Kara ttjv ■^apav lepois ev 
 TO) Tn/St fiTjvt eopTrjV Kai nre- 
 
 58 pnrXovv eis rjfiepas Teaaapas airo eTrraKaiBeKaTTjs, ev ■y o 
 •KepiifKovs Kai, rj rov irevOovs airoKvat.s eyevTjOrj avry ttjv 
 apyrjv' avvTeXecrai, B avTrjs Kai 
 
 59 lepov ayaXfia '^pvcrovv BiaXiOov ev eKuaTW rcav irpcorwv Kat 
 BevTepwv lepcov Kai KaOihpvcrai ev tw dyirp ' o Se Trpo^Trjs 
 fxera toiv eis to aSvrov ep'^ofievwv 
 
 60 lepecov TTpos tov aroXicrfiov toiv dewv oiar) ev rais ayKaXais, 
 oTav a'l e^oSeiai Kai iravTjyvpeis tcov Xoiirav Oewv yivoovTai, 
 OTTiOS VTTO iravTwv opa)//,6vov 
 
 61 Tifiarai Kai "TrpoaKVVTjrai KaXovfievov ^epeviKrjs, avaa-crrjs 
 "jrapOevoov' eivai Be ttjv eTrniOe^evrjv /SacriXeoav ttj eiKovi 
 avTTjs £ia(f>6povcrav ttjs eTririOefievrjs 
 
 62 Tats eiKoaiv tijs fj.rjrpos avrrjs, ^aaiKKrarjs 'BepeviK'qs, eK 
 ara'^vcov Bvoov, (ov ava/jieaov ecrrai rj aaTriBoeiBrjs fiacriXeia, 
 TavTTjs B OTTtcro) avfifierpov (TKrjTrrpov 
 
 63 ira'TTvpoeiBes, o B eioodaaiv ai deal e'^eiv ev rais ■^epaiv' Trepi 
 ov Kai rj ovpa rrjs ^aaiXeias earai TrepieiXTj/jifievrj, asre Kai 
 eK rrjs Biadecreecis ttjs ^aaiXeias Bia- 
 
 G4 cracpeiadai to ^epeviKTjs ovofia Kara Ta eiria-rjiia rrjs lepas 
 
 ypa/xjiaTlK7]s' Kai otuv Ta KiKrjXXia ayrjTai ev tq) ^Loiay 
 
 fjirjvi Trpo TOV irepiTrXov tov Ocreipios, KaTa- 
 65 (TKevaaai ras irapdevovs tcov lepewv aXXo aydXfia 'RepeviKTjs, 
 
 avaacrrjs TrapOevtov, m ffwreXeaovaiv Ojjboias Qvcriav Kai 
 
 TciKka Ta cvvTeXov/ieva vo- 
 
Likes 63—76.] DECREE OP CANOPUS. 7 
 
 60 jMiixa TTj eoprj] ravTrj' e^etvai, Se Kara tuvtu kui rats aXKaos 
 TTapdevois TUis ^ovXofievais crvvreXeiv ra vo/j,ifia tt) det^, 
 vfiveicrdai B' avTr]v Kao v- 
 
 67 TTo TQ3V eirCKejo [xevaiv lepetrnv irapOevav Kai Tas y^eias 
 'iTape')(pfieva>v rots deois, irepiKeifievcov ray iBias ^aa-iXetas 
 Tcov decop, I a>v] lepeiai vo/Mi^ovrai 
 
 68 eivai' Kai orav 6 Trpoaptrjos cnropos irapacTTt], ava<f)epeiv ras 
 lepas irapOevovs aTW^vs tovs Trapadrjcro/jLevovs rq) ayaXfiari 
 T7]s Oeov, aheiv 8' eis avrrjv 
 
 69 Ka6 Tjfiepav Kai ev Tats eoprais icat iravrj'yvpecriv tcov Xomav 
 Gecov rovs re qySovs avSpas Kai ras yvvaiicas, ovs av vp,vovs 
 01 lepoypa/ifiareis ypa- 
 
 7U -ylravres hwcriv T(fi aBoBiBaa-KaXo), mv Kai ravriypa^a Kara- 
 '^(jopicrdi^a-eTai eis ras lepas /3ty3\oi;s' Kai e-jreiSr] tois lepevaiv 
 SiBovTai ai Tpo<f>ai e/c tcov 
 
 71 lepeov, eirav STra'^dcoaiv eis ro irKijOos, BiBocrffai rais 
 dvyarpacriv tcov lepecov sk tcov lepcov vpoaoBcov, a(p rjs av 
 rifiepas yevavrai, rrjv a-vvKpiOrjaoiJLe- 
 
 72 vrjv TpocjjTjv VTTO TCOV ^ovKevTcov lepecov tcov ev enacTTco tcov 
 lepcov KaTa Xoyov tcov lepcov -irpoaoBcov, Kai tov BiBofievov 
 apTOV Tais yvvai^iv 
 
 73 TCOV lepecov e^ew Biov tvttov Kai KaXeicrdai 3epeviK7]s apTOv' 
 6 B' ev sKaaTcp tcov lepcov KaTecTTiqKcos eiricTTaT'qs Kai ap'^^iepevs 
 Kai 01 TOV lepov 
 
 74 ypafifJuaTeis avaypayjraTcoaav tovto i^rrj^iafia eis ctttj'Ktjv 
 \idivr]V 7) j(aKK7}V lepois ypa/x/xacriv Kai AiyvTTTlois Kai 
 'EiWrjviKois Kai avaOe- 
 
 75 Tcoaav ev tco e-jri^avecTTaTa) tottco tcov T6 irpcoTcov lepcov Kai 
 BevTepcov Kai TpiTcov, ottcos oi KaTa ttjv ^(copav lepeis (jjai- 
 vcovTai TifMcovTas tovs T^vepyeTas deovs Kai tu TeKva avTcov, 
 
 76 KaOairep BiKaiov ecj-Tiv. 
 
DECREE OF CANOPUS, 
 
 FROM THE GREEK. 
 
 [Lines 1^11. 
 
 1 In the veign of Ptolemy the son of Ptolemy and of Arsinoe, 
 the brother-gods, in the ninth year [b.c. 238], under Apollonides 
 
 2 the son of Moschion the priest of Alexander, and of the brotber- 
 gods, and of the gods Euergetse, and Menecrateia the daughter of 
 
 3 Philammon the basket-bearer of Arsinoe PhiladelphuSj on the 
 seventh day of the month Apellaius, and the seventeenth of Tybi 
 according to the Egyptians, a Decree ; 
 
 4 The chief priests, and prophets, and those who enter the sanctuary 
 for the robing of the gods, and the feather-bearers, and sacred 
 
 5 scribes, and the other priests who had met together out of the 
 temples throughout the country for the fifth day of Dius, on 
 
 6 which is kept the birthday of the king, and for the twenty-fifth 
 day of the same month on which he received the kingdom from 
 
 7 his father, having met in council together on that day in the 
 temple of the gods Euergeta, which is in Canopus, declared ; 
 
 Whereas King Ptolemy, the son of Ptolemy and Arsinoe the 
 
 8 brother-gods, and Queen Berenice his sister and wife, the gods 
 Euergetse, continue in many and great things benefiting the 
 
 9 temples throughout the country ; and the honours of the gods 
 they have yet further increased ; and of Apis and Mnevis, and of 
 the other celebrated animals which are in the country they take 
 
 10 great care, with great cost and ceremonial expenditure; 
 
 And the sacred images which had been carried out of the 
 
 11 country by the Persians, the king having made war, brought 
 
 safe into Egypt, and gave back to the temples whence each had 
 
DECREE OF CANOPUS, 
 
 PROM THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 
 
 LlHKS 1 — 6.] 
 
 1 In the year ninth, in the month of Apellaius upon the day seven, 
 of Tybi seventeen according to the Egyptians, in the reign of 
 King Ptolemy, living /or ever, beloved hy Pthah, son of Ptolemy 
 «n<^ o/ Arsinoe brother-gods, when the priest of Alexander deceased 
 
 2 and of the brother-gods, and of the gods Euergetee was Apollonides 
 the son of Moschion, and Menecrateia the daughter of Philammon 
 was basket-bearer /or Arsinoe loving her brother, on that day, a 
 Writing ; 
 
 The chief priests of the temples, the high-priests, the guardians 
 
 3 of the temples, the purifiers, those who sing hymns, those who 
 robe the gods, the writers of the sacred books, the other 
 divine prophets, having purified themselves, being assembled 
 together, having come from the two provinces of Upper and Lower 
 Egypt, for the fifth day of Dius, when the anniversary day of his 
 majesty was celebrated, likewise upon the twenty fifth- day of that 
 
 4 month when his majesty received his great kingdom from his 
 father, having celebrated religious honours in the temple of the 
 gods Euergetse, which is in Canopus, declared this Decree ; 
 
 King Ptolemy living /or ever, beloved hy Pthah, son of Ptolemy 
 and o/ Arsinoe the brother-gods, likewise Queen Berenice Ais sister 
 band wife, the gods Euergetse; he made columns with great 
 expense for all the temples of the country of Egypt, he prepared 
 obelisks, colossal statues, for the. gods, with great abundance of 
 things fit, when, behold, he supplied all the other yearly things for 
 the bull Apis and the bull Mnevis, and the animals in ihe temples, 
 regulating in the cities of Egypt with other great gifts, excellent 
 
 gifts of revenues j 
 6 And that he might make re-conquest of the sacred images 
 which had been captured by the barbarians of Persia, he made 
 war on behalf of the cities of Egypt with good fortune; his 
 
10 FEOM THE GREEK. [LiNES 12—21. 
 
 12 been at first taken away, and hath kept the country in peace, 
 carrying war on its behalf against many nations, and those who 
 
 13 have power in them j and to all those in the country, and to all 
 others under their dominion, they render justice; 
 
 14 And once when the Nile rose rather insuflSciently, and all those 
 in the country were struck down by what had happened, and 
 
 15 were considering the calamity that had happened, under some of 
 the former sovereigns, under whom it happened that those who 
 inhabited the country were ruined by the drought, standing 
 
 16 forward carefully, having forethought in many things for those 
 in the temples, and the others who inhabit the country, 
 
 17 and overlooking not a few of the taxes for the welfare of the men, 
 out of Syria, and Pheuicia, and Cyprus, and many other places, 
 
 18 having sent for corn, into the country at great expense, they saved 
 the inhabitants of Egypt, 
 
 19 leaving immortal beneficence and a very great memory of their 
 virtue, both to those who now are, and to those who shall be here- 
 after ■ in return for which the gods have given to them a well- 
 
 20 established kingdom, and will give them all other good things for 
 ever; 
 
 [may it be] with good fortune. 
 
 It seemed fit to the priests throughout the country, to increase 
 
Lines 7— 11.] PROM THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 11 
 
 majesty plundered the fields of other lands, and foreign countries 
 to the conspicuous glory and prosperity of the country ; he gave 
 them to the palaces of the temples which had been plundered, 
 
 7 having made to spring up good fortune and joy to Egypt with 
 rejoicing and praises; he fought and made war on behalf of the 
 burial-places against the hated ones and the countries of the 
 numerous barbarians, he cut off the heads of the barbarians, and 
 those who govern them, justice he upheld to all the living men 
 and women of the country, and of the other lands of the men and 
 women under his dominion; 
 
 8 When, behold, it came to pass upon a year that the Nile 
 failed on the right day of the season, all the living men and 
 women of the cities, those were struck down by the event, when, 
 behold, the evil fortune that had happened. 
 
 Having read of the destruction once upon a time of happiness 
 befallen in the times of former chief sovereigns, under whom it 
 happened by accident that the Nile failed to Egypt in the day of 
 Q'the season ; and his majesty {may he be praised) and his sister, 
 they fed those who bum incense in the Egyptian temples, and 
 likewise the various cities of Egypt. 
 
 At the times appointed he remitted numerous taxes on corn, he 
 gave thousands of necessaries and expenses for the good welfare of 
 the men and women each, he brought wheat to Egypt from the 
 
 10 Syrians o/ * * * city, from the land of Caphtor [or Phenicia], 
 from the foreign island of Cyprus, which is m * * * the 
 great sea, and great countries ; he gave numerous pieces of silver 
 and leek-plants, and spelt-seed for the good fortune of the living 
 meu and women ; 
 
 By a decree from the land of * * * city he gave fame with- 
 out end of his benevolence for ever ; likewise they will talk of the 
 revenues among the hereafter men and women; and for these so 
 many things a gift from the gods of the established high office of 
 
 1 1 ruler of Upper and Lower Egypt with children of his own, and 
 poor people, with servants unto times for ever; with good for- 
 tune. 
 
 And because of such things, the priests belonging to the 
 
12 FROM THE GREEK. [llNES 22—32. 
 
 21 the before existing honours in the temples unto King Ptolemy and 
 Queen Berenice, the gods Euergetse, and to their parents the 
 
 22 brother-gods, and to their forefathers the gods Soteres ; and that 
 the priests which are in each of the temples throughout the 
 country should be further named priests also of the gods Euer- 
 
 23 getse ; and that there should be written on all their decrees, and 
 that on the rings which they wear should be further engraved also, 
 the priesthood of the gods Euergetse ; 
 
 24 And that there should be further appointed unto the now existing 
 four tribes, out of the multitude of priests which are in each 
 
 25 temple, a fifth tribe, to be named that of the gods Euergetse; and 
 whereas with good fortune it also happened that the birth of King 
 
 26 Ptolemy, the son of the brother-gods, took place on the fifth day 
 of Dius, which also has been the origin of much good to all men ; 
 
 27 that into this tribe should be chosen those who had been made 
 priests since the first year, and those who should be added until 
 the month of Mesore in the ninth year, and their descendants for 
 
 28 ever; but that those who had been priests before, until the first 
 year, should remain likewise in those tribes in which they had 
 
 29 been before, and also that their descendants should from the 
 present time be distributed into the same tribes in which their 
 fathers were ; 
 
 30 And instead of the twenty priestly senators, who are now year 
 by year chosen out of the hitherto existing four tribes, of whom 
 five are taken from each tribe, there shall be twenty-five priestly 
 
 31 senators, five others being further taken out of the fifth tribe 
 belonging to the gods Euergetse ; and that those of the fifth tribe 
 
 32 belonging to the gods Euergetse shall partake of the holy things, 
 and of all the other things in the temples ; and that its chief 
 
LiHBS 12— 16.] FROM THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 13 
 
 country were led further to prepare other expenses for King 
 Ptolemy living for ever, beloved by Pthah, and Queen Berenice, 
 the gods Euergetse, in the temples, and for the brother-gods, their 
 
 12 buried parents, likewise for the gods Soteres, who have been laid 
 aside, and for those the ancestors beyond ; and that the priests of 
 each of all the Egyptian temples, belonging to the cities of Egypt, 
 hereafter should in addition be named priests of the gods Euer- 
 getje. They should add the name of the priestly high offices to 
 be written, and the further priestly office of chief builder unto 
 the gods Euergetse on the signet-ring to be made, and worn upon 
 the hands ; 
 
 13 Another tribe of priests shall be appointed in the temples here- 
 after, to be in addition to the four tribes of old, on that day to he 
 made into a fifth tribe, for the gods Euergetse. And whereas there 
 once happened, with good fortune and good fortune, because the 
 birth of King Ptolemy, living for ever, beloved by Pthah, son of 
 the brother-gods, in the month Dius, upon the fifth day, made on 
 
 14 that day our good and great happiness unto all the living men and 
 women ; there shall be enrolled such priests as have been already of 
 the rank of Soten in the temples, since that first year of his 
 majesty, and likewise those shall be enrolled, those immediately 
 going to be of that rank until the month of Mesore, in the ninth 
 year, within that tribe ; likewise those born of them for ever. 
 But the priests each, it is decreed, who had been added before the 
 
 15 first year of old into the appointed tribes iw^o which they had been 
 added in like manner as before, and those bom after that time, 
 shall be further kept among the scribes of the tribes which were 
 of their fathers, among those which had been made. 
 
 Instead of the twenty priestly senators chosen yearly by the 
 year out of the four existing tribes, consisting of five scribes, which 
 
 16 are from within each tribe, there shall be twenty-five priestly 
 senators ; five scribes in addition being divided ofi^ from the fifth 
 tribe belonging to the gods Euergetse. And there shall be given 
 to the appointed fifth scribe belonging to the gods Euergetse, from 
 all those things hitherto made, the purifications in the temple and 
 
14 rilOM THE GREEK. [JLlNBS 33—42. 
 
 33 shall be so in respect to those things in which he is over the other 
 four tribes ; 
 
 And whereas in every month the festivals of the gods Euergetse 
 are celebrated in the temples according to the former decree (the 
 
 34 fifth, the ninth, and the twenty-fifch), and festivals and assemblies 
 at the national expense are performed every year to the other great 
 
 35 gods, there shall \)e held every year an assembly at the national 
 expense in the temples and throughout the whole country to King 
 
 36 Ptolemy and Queen Berenice, the gods Euergetae, on the day in 
 which the star of Isis rises heliacally, which is considered by the 
 holy scribes to be the new year. 
 
 37 This is kept now in this ninth year on the new moon day of the 
 month of Payni, in which month are kept the little festival of 
 
 38 Bubastis, and the gve&t festival of Bubastis, and the gathering of 
 the fruits, and the rising of the river takes place. But if it 
 should happen that the heliacal rising of the star passes on to an- 
 
 39 other day, because of the four years, the assembly shall not so pass 
 on, but be kept on the new moon day of Payni, on which dai/ it 
 
 40 was kept from the beginning in the year, and it shall be celebrated 
 during five days with the carrying of crowns, and sacrifices, and 
 libations, and the other things that are fit ; 
 
 41 So that the seasons also may do what is fit in every way ac- 
 cording to the present arrangement of the world, and that it may 
 not happen that some of the national festivals, which are held in 
 the winter, should be sometimes held in the summer, in conse- 
 
 42 quence of the star moving one day in four years, and that others 
 
Lines 17—21.] FROM THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 15 
 
 all other things done in the sanctuaries of the country ; and the 
 chief of that tribe, the royal high-priest, shall be remembered like 
 as when included in the established four tribes. 
 
 17 Whereas there was ordered to he kept an assembly unto the 
 gods Euergetse in the temples, which has been celebrated every 
 month, upon the fifth day, upon the ninth day, and upon the 
 twenty-fifth day, according to the writing made at first, there was 
 added, and there was celebrated an assembly unto the great gods j 
 and a festival throughout the country suitably in every year ; there 
 shall be celebrated a conspicuous suitable festival, unto King 
 
 18 Ptolemy, living for ever, beloved by Pthah, and Queen Berenice, 
 the gods Euergetse, throughout the two regions in every city of 
 Egypt at the time when the day of the star of Isis shining is 
 placed, which is named the new-year's day by the scribes of 
 heavenly life. 
 
 It is celebrated in this ninth year in the month of Payni, with 
 holding an assembly of the new-year's day unto Pasht, and a 
 festival unto Pasht in that month, * * * because of which 
 the season for the religious ceremonies of all the fruits and the 
 
 19 overflowing of the Nile is celebrated. Behold a decree is 
 made ; behold if it should happen by accident that the changing 
 of the festival of the star of Isis shall be placed a day further, 
 because of the fourth year, by nothing shall the religious cere- 
 mony of that day be kept at a later time; that assembly shall 
 be celebrated conspicuously, being begun upon the month of 
 Payni, the first day, as the celebration of the assembly was 
 
 20 kept by us in this ninth year. That assembly shall be cele- 
 brated during five days with persons bringing diadems, with 
 corn, with other sacrifices on the altar, the like doings, and all 
 other things shall be celebrated which were made at a former 
 time conspicuously; 
 
 Behold if it is done, the seasons shall be in respect of every 
 
 21 thing like the former decree which was about the heavens, and 
 that day of the Dog-star shall not have a turning about, that it 
 shall happen to come to pass at any time, by the decree that the 
 assemblies should be made to change in the country, that those 
 
16 FROM THE GREEK. [LiKES 43— 52. 
 
 of those now held in the summer, should be held in the winter in 
 
 43 the future seasons, as had formerly happened to come to pass, 
 from the arrangement of the natural year remaining of three 
 
 44 hundred and sixty days and of the five days which were after- 
 wards ordered to be added ; from the first day the festival of the 
 gods Euergetse being now carried forward, because of the four 
 
 45 years, on to the five days added on before the new civil year ; so 
 that all men may know how the former defect in the arrangement 
 
 46 of the seasons, and of the natural year, and of the decrees about 
 the whole disposition of the pole, happened to be amended and 
 made perfect by the gods Euergetse ; 
 
 47 And whereas a daughter had been born to King Ptolemy and 
 Queen Berenice, the gods Euergetse, and was named Berenice, who 
 was immediately proclaimed a queen ; and it happened that this 
 
 48 maiden, as on a sudden, passed away into the eternal world, while 
 the priests who had come up to the king for the year were yet 
 
 49 remaining near him, who immediately celebrating a great grief 
 for what had happened, having thought it right, persuaded the 
 
 50 king and queen to consecrate the goddess with Osiris in the 
 temple of Canopus, which is not only among the principal 
 temples, but is also very much honoured by the king and by all 
 men throughout the country. 
 
 51 And the bringing up of the sacred barge of Osiris is made to 
 this temple yearly out of the temple in the Heracleium on the 
 twenty-ninth day of Chceac, while the priests of the course of 
 
 52 all the temples, complete the sacrifices upon the altars dedicated 
 by them for each temple of those which are of the first rank, out 
 
Lines 22— 26.] FROM THE HIEROGLYPHICS. ]7 
 
 which are held in winter should be held in the summer in each 
 seasoHj from the change of the festival of the star of Isis by one 
 day, because of the fourth year as decreed ; and the other assem- 
 blies, behold, those- which are held belonging to the summer 
 throughout Egypt, we should hold in the winter in the coming 
 
 22 seasons, like what happened to come to pass of old in the chief 
 provinces, because of this event, if behold the arrangement of the 
 year shall be made with days three hundred and sixty, and five 
 additional peculiar days ordered to be added; to celebrate the 
 additional first day of the assembly unto the gods Euergetse away 
 from that day, because of the fourth year, until the added five 
 days additional, which were added upon the new-year's day; so 
 that it may be made known to all men and women about this 
 
 23 former defect in the arrangement in respect of the civil years and 
 the natural year, and the commands which relate to the judgments 
 of amendment of the faults of the heavens which happened to 
 come to pass, "behold, it is the production, the adornment solely, 
 and the excellence of the gods Euergetse. 
 
 Whereas when a daughter was born unto King Ptolemy, living 
 for ever, beloved by Pthah, and Queen Berenice, the gods Euergetse, 
 unto them, Berenice was her name, she was immediately pro- 
 
 24 claimed a queen ; by accident, behold, the same goddess, a little 
 woman, was taken away into heaven, whilst the priests who had 
 come from the country near the king's presence, were yet remain- 
 ing in the presence of his majesty, celebrating the great lamenta- 
 tion and the praises, considering about the particulars, they asked 
 froin the king and queen, the gift from them, to grant to con- 
 
 25 secrate the same goddess like Osiris, in the temple of Canopus, 
 which is among the principal temples, for which great expense of 
 the Egyptians, expense for them was prepared by the king and the 
 living men and women of the country. 
 
 •<■ At the time when, behold, we shall draw along Osiris during the 
 drawing along of the barge to the same temple, at the season of 
 
 26 the year, from the temple which is in Heracleium, on the twenty- 
 ninth of the month of Choeac, when the Egyptians, of the princi- 
 pal temples at the time of completing the sacrifices upon the altars 
 
18 FROM THE GREEK. [Lines 53— 61. 
 
 53 of both the two divisions of the course, and with these things 
 that are lawful towards her deification and towards the release 
 from the grief they bestowed liberally and carefully, as upon the 
 
 54 Apis and Mnevis, upon whom it is lawful to be done j 
 
 It seemed fit to pay to Queen Berenice, who had been born to 
 
 55 the gods Euergetse, immortal honours in all the temples through- 
 out the country ; and in the month of Tybi, when she entered 
 among the gods, (in which month also the daughter of the Sun 
 in the beginning changed her life,) whom her father having set 
 
 56 up named at one time his crown, at another time his eyesight, and 
 they keep a feast and a water-procession to her in most of the 
 temples of the first rank ; 
 
 57 In this month in which her deification in the beginning took 
 place, to make also to Queen Berenice, the daughter of the gods 
 Euergetse, in all the temples throughout the country in the month 
 
 58 of Tybi, a festival and a water-procession for four days from the 
 seventeenth day in which the water-procession and the release 
 from the grief was at first made for her ; 
 
 59 And to complete for her a sacred image of gold and precious 
 stones in each of the temples of first and of second rank, and to 
 
 60 con-secrate it in the holy place ; and the prophet with the priests 
 who enter the sanctuary for the robing of the gods shall carry it 
 in his arms, when the goings out, and the assemblies of the other 
 
 Ql gods, take place, so that when seen by all it may be honoured 
 and worshipped, being called the statue of Berenice, queen of 
 maidens. 
 
Lines 27— 31.] FROM THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 19 
 
 of the principal temples, hy the one part and the other part of the 
 family of those of that temple, are joining with harps and all the 
 other religious ceremonies for the celebration of the dedication of 
 her raising up as a goddess, Ijiere was made for her a libation to 
 
 27 heal the grief of her raising up, they prepared them with perse- 
 verance and care, as the ceremonies for the Apis bull and Mnevis 
 bull are celebrated ; 
 
 It was determined that there should be given, according to a 
 command, immortal honours unto Queen Berenice, the daughter 
 of the gods Euergetse, in the temples of the country al the times 
 at which once upon a time she was taken up among the gods, in 
 
 ■^8 the month of Tybi, {the month in which Ra himself took up his 
 own daughter to heaven, and that is celebrated ; ) who unto him 
 was named the apple of his eye, and the asp the ornament of his 
 head, the beloved of her father. They shall celebrate unto her an 
 assembly with a water-procession in the sanctuaries in the greater 
 part of the temples of the first rank ; 
 
 in this month when the making a goddess of the queen is 
 celebrated J in addition there shall be celebrated one assembly, 
 there shall be made one water-procession unto Queen Berenice, the 
 
 29 daughter of the gods Euergetse, in the temples of the two regions, 
 in the times of the month Tybi, from the seventeenth day, when 
 was kept her water-procession, and was made for her a libation to 
 heal the grief for her, it was celebrated as on the first day, during 
 four days ; 
 
 To set up a sacred statue unto that goddess of gold and all 
 
 30 polished stones in the temples of the first rank, in the temples of 
 the second rank, at the times oj^ consecrating in the holy place; 
 the priest, the prophet, of the sacred barge, with the other chosen 
 priests of the great purifications, and those who sing praises to 
 the gods, and those who robe the gods, he shall carry it in his 
 two arms, so that it may be seen on the day of the carrying out, 
 and of the assemblies of the god, in the times ; whereby it may 
 be seen by all men and women that worship is to be paid at once 
 
 31 unto the distinguished Berenice, and how the queen of women is 
 carried out. 
 
 c 2 
 
20 FROM THE GREEK. [Lines 62 — 73. 
 
 62 And a royal crown is to be placed on her statue, more excellent 
 than that placed on the statues of her mother the Queen Berenice, 
 of two ears of corn, between which shall be an asp-shaped crown, 
 
 63 and behind this a papyrus-shaped sceptre of the same height, 
 such as the goddesses are accustomed to hold in their hands, 
 around which also the tail of the crown [or asp] shall be twisted, so 
 
 64 that from the arrangement of the crown, the name of Berenice 
 may be clearly shown, according to the character of the sacred 
 
 And when the Kikellia are held in the month of Choeac, before 
 
 65 the water-procession of Osiris, the maidens of the temples shall 
 prepare another image of Berenice, the queen of maidens, unto 
 which they shall in like manner perform a sacrifice and the other 
 
 66 rites which ought to be performed at that feast ; 
 
 And it shall be lawful according to this for the other maidens, 
 who wish to perform rites unto the goddess, to sing hymns to her, 
 
 67 both under the above-named priestly maidens, and those who 
 furnish necessaries to the gods, when they put the proper crowns 
 upon the gods, unto whom they are appointed to be priestesses ; 
 
 68 And when the early corn seed shall show itself, the holy 
 maidens shall bring ears of corn to be placed upon the image of 
 
 69 the goddess, and the men and women shall sing to her day by 
 day in the festivals and assemblies of the other gods the songs, 
 
 70 which hymns the sacred scribes, when they have written out, 
 shall give to the master of the singing, and of which copies shall 
 be written into the sacred books. 
 
 71 And when the food is given to the priests out of the temples, 
 when they are brought out to the multitude, there shall be given 
 to the daughters of the priests, out of the holy revenue from the 
 
 72 day that they are born, the food adjudged by the priestly senators, 
 those of each of the temples, according to the word of the priests 
 
 73 of the revenue; and the bread given to the wives of the priests 
 shall have a divine pattern, and be called the bread of Berenice. 
 
Lines 32— 36.] FROM THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 21 
 
 Behold, ii is decreed that -the crown upon thai sacred statue 
 shall be not less ceremonial than the appointed crown on the 
 statues of her mother the Queen Berenice ; it is to be placed con- 
 spicuously with two ears of corn, and an asp on the back, and a 
 sceptre of papyrus flowers, to be held up ; the papyrus flowers, 
 the crown and the asp, the same as what is customary in the two 
 hands of the goddesses ; the tail of the same asp is to be twisted 
 
 32 on that sceptre; by which arrangement between those ears of 
 corn may be shown the name of Berenice in the characters of the 
 scribes of heavenly life. 
 
 And during the days of the celebration of the Kikellia, in the 
 month of Chceac, in addition to the water-procession of Osiris, it 
 shall be granted unto the women, the wives of the priests, to 
 prepare another statue of Berenice chief of women, and to 
 
 33 perform sacrifices and other things, which shall be celebrated 
 upon the days of that assembly. 
 
 By this, it is decreed, behold, for other women who are willing, 
 that they shall celebrate their own unto that goddess, and sing 
 hymns to that goddess, behold, under chosen priestesses, and 
 servant-priestesses ivho carij the things that are carried of the 
 gods, to whom they are appointed for priestly women. 
 
 When, behold, the early corn has sprung up and is con- 
 
 34 spicuous, the priestesses of the first rank shall bring ears of corn 
 and give them to the statue of the same goddess ; they shall sing 
 songs to her upon appointed times; these songs the men and 
 women, both husbands and wives shall sing in places, and assem- 
 blies, at the carrying out of the gods, songs from among which a 
 man of heavenly life shall give unto the chief learned man of the 
 singers to write a copy in the books of heavenly life. 
 
 Because of this when the dedicated loaves are distributed to 
 
 35 the priests from out of the temples to those already of the family 
 of the chief priest of the temple of any place, there shall be dis- 
 tributed presence bread unto the daughters of the chiefs of the 
 priests, since the day of their hirth was celebrated, from the 
 sacred dedicated loaves of the gods out of the presence bread 
 marked with a pattern, as adjudged by the priests the senators in 
 
22 FROM THE GREEK. [LiNES 74—76. 
 
 And he that has been appointed superior and chief priest, in 
 
 74 each of the temples, and the scribes of the temples, shall write 
 this decree upon a tablet of stone or copper in letters sacred, and 
 
 75 Egyptian, and Greek ; and shall place it in the most conspicuous 
 place in the temples of first, of second, and of third rank, so that 
 the priests throughout the country may show to those who honour 
 
 76 the gods Euergetse what is right. 
 
Lines 36, 37.] FROM the hieroglyphics. 23 
 
 the sanctuaries of the two regions, henceforth agreeably to the 
 command of ^Ae priests of the dedicated loaves; and the loaves 
 
 36 which are given to the wives of the priests shall be marked with a 
 pattern impressed upon the loaf, put thereon ; and they are to be 
 named the loaves of Berenice. 
 
 The same learned prophet of the plpce, the consecrated scribe 
 of the senators, the representatives of all the temple-priests, the 
 chief of the temple-yard priests, and the scribes of the temples, 
 
 37 shall carve the inscription on a tablet of stone or copper, in letters 
 of heavenly life, letters for books, letters for the Greeks, to be set 
 up in a conspicuous place for men and women in the temples of 
 the first rank, temples of the second rank, temples of the third 
 rank, so that sight of it may be given to all men and women how 
 preparation is to be made, by the priests of the temples of the 
 cities of Egypt, for the gods Tjluergetse and their children ; behold, 
 the religious ceremonies for the doings. 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS IN THE FOLLOWING PAOES. 
 
 D.S. means the Determinative Sign, or figure of an object, following its 
 
 name spelt with letters. 
 Voc. means the Author's Vocabulary, accompanying his work on " Egyptian 
 
 Hieroglyphics." 
 
EXPLANATION OF THE HIEEOG-LYPHICS. 
 
 Line 1. 
 
 1 The Year; BAIj T^ followed by a ring, the Determinative- 
 Sign for Time, which is used also in the words Month and Day. 
 The first character is the palm branch, in Coptic &A.I ; the second, 
 T, may be the feminine article; and the D.S. thus distinguishes 
 two words which were spelt and sounded nearly alike. This is 
 the £To;, or civil year, used in dates, as distinguished from 
 No. 7, 33, the sviauro;, or natural year of the seasons. Voc. 953. 
 That the D.S. is a picture of the sun is shown at No. 5, 22, 
 where it has the vowel following -it, and is the word, pH, the sun. 
 The word B AI, for year, is not known in Coptic ; but see No. 5, 
 22 : eTTEpOJUini, where our character for BAI is the last syllable, 
 MPI. The character for T is the picture of a Hill, and gains its 
 force from TA-V, a hill. The Hebrew letter n may perhaps be a 
 rude copy of it; as it is called by its Egyptian name, Tau. 
 
 2 Ninth ; nine strokes followed by the definite article T, which, 
 however, in Coptic, is prefixed, not postfixed, to the Cardinal 
 number to make an Ordinal. 
 
 3 In the month of Apellaius, the Macedonian month which, 
 began in the middle of November; A,P,A,L,A,A,0,S, followed by 
 the ring, the D.S. for time. Here we might learn the force of 
 four letters, if they were not otherwise known. The hawk, in 
 Coptic A.gOAJl, may, by careless pronunciation, by dropping the 
 last letter, have been called AO, and hence given its force to 
 the letter. In this way all the letters probably received their 
 force. They had probably all, at first, syllabic sounds, rather than 
 alphabetic ; and we shall see that those characters in which two 
 consonants were clearly sounded never got into use as letters. 
 
 4 Upon the day; S,S,0; CACA. upon; with the word Day 
 omitted, but represented by the D.S. for Time. See No. 3, 21, 
 and 13, 42. 
 
Line 1.1 EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 25 
 
 5 Seventh j seven strokes, but with no letters to make the 
 Cardinal number into an Ordinal, as in the word Ninth, No. 2. 
 
 6 Tybi ; the Egyptian month, written not phonetically, by cha- 
 racters whose sound represented the word, but symbolically, 
 expressive of the meaning. The names of the months seem to be 
 the only hieroglyphical words so written. The first character 
 means First, the second House, see Nos. 2, 18 ; the third E, for 
 ipi, to do ; making together The first op housing, followed by 
 the D.S. for Time. Voc. 981, 995. 
 
 7 Seventeen ; seven strokes, with the half ring for ten, as at 
 No. 15, 24. 
 
 8 According to; N, the preposition rf, of. Voc. 1292. This 
 character is the representation of water, of which the Egyptian 
 name was, as we learn from Horapollo, Noun. Hence came, after 
 several changes, both the form and name of the Hebrew letter 
 
 Nun. 
 
 9 The Egyptians j CH, 0, plural, a shortened form of CH, M,0, 
 ^HJUI, Egypt. Voc. 775. See No. 8, 31, which is not so 
 shortened. It seems to be used as an adjective to the following 
 substantive. See also Saviour — Gods. No. 12, 2, for the force 
 of the first letter. 
 
 10 Country] the line with three dots is TO, the next letter, E or 
 I, making TOl, lands ; followed by T, the definite article, which 
 
 in Coptic would be prefixed; and by the circular D.S. for a City 
 or Country. Voc. 777. 
 
 11 In the reign; CH, R,B, In Coptic SCOjpi is Powerful, 
 which may well be part of our word; XCOpn, is to strike, which 
 is not quite so suitable. The last letter B is from RtO, and 
 represents a club, or short sceptre. See No, 2, 19, where this 
 letter is again used. 
 
 12 SE, T; the twig is tfe, a plant. This is the name of one of the 
 four orders of Egyptian priests, Voc. 644, It is usually spelt 
 SETEN. Voc. 648. It is in Herodotus written Sethon, as the 
 title of an Egyptian general ; Manetho writes it Sethos as a title of 
 Rameses II, It was used more particularly for the king of Upper 
 Egypt, as the following priestly title was for Lower Egypt. 
 
26 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 1. 
 
 Together they represent the Greek word King, meaning of Upper 
 and Lower Egypt. See No. 8, 24. 
 
 13 NOU, T; the name of an order of priests^ and a royal title 
 belonging more particularly to Lower Egypt. Voc. 663. 
 
 14 Ptolemy; P,T,0,L,M,A,A,S. The king's name, including 
 some of his titles, is written within an oval ring with a flat end. 
 This ring seems meant to represent an engraved signet-ring. As 
 the artist could not write the name on the flat seal, he has written 
 it within the ring. The other royal names, as Arsinoe, Alex- 
 ander, Berenice, are inclosed in the same ovals. The M in this 
 name may be the origin of the Hebrew D. 
 
 15 Living; here written with an O, the short for Off ^ Voc. 
 1403, 1407. This particular O, is never used except in this 
 word. It may be seen carried in the hand of the Egyptian gods, 
 and otherwise used as an ornament. It has been called a key ; 
 but the character for a key is drawn rather differently. 
 
 16 For ever; H,T,N; gHTert, the end, is the Coptic word 
 nearest to this well-known hieroglyphic. Voc. 594. We may 
 compare this with the Greek expression, in the New Testament, 
 £<f tou aiava until the end of the age, or until the beginning 
 of the next age ; which we sometimes render For ever. The 
 horizontal line is N, and is in place of the wavy line No. 1, 8, 
 and must not be confounded with the T, the first letter in No. 1, 
 10. See the Rosatta stone, where this word is sometimes 
 written with one form of N, and sometimes with the other. 
 
 17 By Pthah, the god of Memphis, as Ra was of Thebes ; P,T,H. 
 Voc. 195. 
 
 18 Beloved; M, for SiXHl to love. Voc. 1500, Together these 
 two words mean By Pthah beloved. Had the word Love stood 
 first, they would have meant Loving Pthah. Both forms were 
 used by Rameses II., namely Mi-amun, and Amun-mai. 
 
 19 Son; S,E, for tyHpe. Voc. 1789. The goose has the force 
 of an S from tfEtyG, a goose. 
 
 30 Of ; N, the proposition It ; see No. 8. 
 
 31 Ptolemy; see No. 1, 14. 
 
 32 Arsinoe ; A,R,S,I,N,A, with T,S ; of which S is the feminine 
 
Line 1.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 27 
 
 termination, and T the feminine article, which is prefixed in 
 Coptic, but in the Hieroglyphics usually postfixed, as in No. 
 14, 14; and sometimes inserted before the last letter, as in No. 
 9, 35 and No. 33, 47. The R in this name is the same character 
 as the L in Ptolemy. The Egyptians rarely distinguished those 
 two letters. The egg may have the force of an S, from being a 
 goose's egg, and used for the goose tfejiJE, or it may be from 
 the word CCOOYgl, an egg. 
 
 23 Bbother-gods, the title of the second Ptolemy and his 
 second queen ; in Greek Brother-loving. This queen was also his 
 sister. The third Ptolemy was not the son of this queen, but of 
 the first wife, and hence not in strictness the son of the Brother- 
 gods. The hatchet or mallet has the force of NOU, from ftOYT 
 to bruise, and represents ftOYTG a god, with or without an addi- 
 tional T. The other character is S, for COIt a brother. See 
 No. 2, 12 for Brother. 
 
 24 Priest, represented pictorially by a man in the act of making 
 a libation to the gods. As the word is not spelt, its sound is 
 doubtful. It may be the hieroglyphical word OTHPH, dedi- 
 cated, from OYOTefi. to pour out an offering. 
 
 25 Ofj N; ft, of; another form of the preposition. No. 1, 8. 
 See Voc. 1295. It represents the crown peculiar to Lower 
 Egypt, and worn by the priests of the order Nout, No. 13. Its 
 name was probably EIN, and hence it is the letter N. The word 
 OYEIt, shining, explains the meaning of its name, as it was the 
 Holy Crown of Exodus xxix. 6, the Bright Plate of Exod. 
 xxviii. 36. 
 
 26 Alexander; A,L,K,S,A,A,N,T,R,S ; or to the mouth might 
 be given the force of RO, from po, a mouth ; and thus we should 
 have the vowel required to make Alexandros. The Greek R takes 
 its name Rho from the Egyptian name of this character. The hand 
 is a T, from TOT, a hand ; and the Hebrew letter Teth, which is 
 also a hand, is known to be borrowed from this by its keeping its 
 Egyptian name. 
 
 27 Deceased; M,0; AJIOV to die. The second letter is of 
 doubtful force ; but the place of the word shows what is required. 
 
28 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LiHE 1. 
 
 See Voc. 1645, also 1640, for the more usual forms of this word, 
 which is of very frequent use after a person's name. 
 
 28 And ; A,H ; A-gA. and. Voc. 1271. The arm is A, a force 
 which perhaps may be found in UlA-gE a cubit measure, in which 
 word the XI may be a servile affix. 
 
 29 The Brother-gods, the same as No. 1, 23. 
 
 30 And, the same as No. 1, 28. 
 
 31 The GODS Euergetjs, or Benefactors, the title of the now 
 reigning sovereigns, the third Ptolemy and his queen. The 
 smaller character may Ji)A.Y, benevolent, useful. We shall find 
 it with the force of SH at No. 5, 16 ; No. 16, 34, and No. 29, 32. 
 It represents tye a staff, and thence takes its name. The Egyp- 
 tians, whether kings or great landowners, usually hold in their 
 hands a long staff, which rests on the ground, called in Hebrew 
 the staff of inheritance, and also a short sceptre. The character 
 in this word is probably the staff, with the place for the hand to 
 grasp it near the top, while the character in No, 1, 11, is the 
 short sceptre, with the place for the hand near the bottom. 
 
 32 Apollonides; A,P,0,L,A,N,I,T,S, followed by the figure of 
 a man sitting on the ground, the usual D.S. after the name of a 
 private person. It answers the purpose of the ring, the sign of a 
 royal name. The letter I is written by a double A ; the hand, T, 
 has also the force of D, a letter not known in Egyptian words. 
 
 Line 2. 
 
 1 That, or who, meaning the son of, agreeably to the Greek 
 idiom, where the word Son is omitted. It is PH,N, or P,N. 
 See No. 2, 7 for the force of the P. See No. 13, 14 and 13, 47 ; 
 also No. 2, 16 and 3, 26, where the same word has a P of a 
 different form. Voc. 1376. We may conjecture that it repre- 
 sents n I the, MT who, as in its present form it is ilot found in 
 Coptic. 
 
 2 MoscHiON J E,M,0,S,K,I,A,N ; followed by the usual D.S. for 
 a man. We very frequently find in hieroglyphics a vowel omitted 
 before the liquids M,N, and R, but here, in a very unusual way, 
 we find a vowel unnecessarily prefixed. The translator, in his 
 care to write the Greek name fully, writes EM for M. The owl. 
 
Line 2.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 29 
 
 M, is often the syllable MO, and hence amongst the various 
 forms of the letter M is chosen because it is to be followed by an 
 0. The unnecessary addition of the shows the translator's 
 careful exactness. Towards the end of the inscription, letters are 
 more freely omitted. 
 
 3 And ; A,0 ; A.t(JJ. In other places this group represents 
 OY, the prefix for the indefinite article. 
 
 4 Menecrateia; E,M,A,N,A,K,R,A,T,A, followed by the D.S. 
 of a woman sitting. Here, as in the name of Moschion, No. 3, 3, 
 we have E M very unnecessarily written for M. The more 
 common D.S. for a woman is a figure sitting with the knees on 
 the ground, and holding a flower in her hand, see Voc. 1757. But 
 throughout this inscription she is distinguished from a man only 
 by an ornament on the head. 
 
 5 The DAUGHTER J T,S,T. The one T is the definite article 
 feminine, the other the feminine termination of the noun. Voc. 
 1797. See the word Son, No. 1, 19. 
 
 6 Of ; N, the preposition ft, as No. 1, 8. 
 
 7 Philammon; PH,I,L,A,M,A,N, with D.S. of a man. The 
 last two letters may be said to be misplaced for the artist's con- 
 venience. But it is often difficult to know which of two letters is 
 to be read first, as in the cases of No. 1, 28, and No. 20, 2. The 
 owl has its force as M from XtA-Y, solitary, and is in Coptic 
 K&.KKA.JUIA.V, the solitary of the dark. Philammon is a Greek 
 translation of the name Mi-amun ; they both mean Loving the 
 God Amun, and are formed like Philosopher, a luver of wisdom. 
 They may be contrasted with Amun-mai, and Theophilus, which 
 contain the word Beloved, not Loving ; and they are a proof that 
 the Egyptians, like the Jews, taught the duty of loving their gods, 
 which remark cannot be made upon the names of Greeks and 
 Romans. 
 
 8 Bearer, a figure carrying a burden on the head, which when 
 joined to the next word Basket, becomes Basket-bearer. But 
 in other cases this figure is the word Conspicuous. See No. 37, 
 18, &c. 
 
 9 Of Basket; T,N,A, with the D.S. of a basket; probably 
 
30 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Like 2. 
 
 XA-WO, a basket, as in consequence of the nation's use of gutturals, 
 the T and Th are not only confounded with H, but often with G, 
 Ch, and K. Thus Champsi, the name of the crocodile in Hero- 
 dotus, is in hieroglyphics Themsi, Voc. 1861, and gives its name 
 to Lake Temsi ; EOUJty Ethiopia is in Hebrew Cush. From the 
 same reason Nubia, named from rf OVB. gold, is in Hebrew Knub, 
 and Kub. 
 
 10 For ; N,E,M, rf EUl. The unusual character written across 
 the owl is probably E ; see No. 23, 11, for this word written with 
 a more usual letter, and No. 23, 18, and 24, 35, for the force of 
 this unusual letter. 
 
 11 Aesinoe. See No. 1, 23. 
 
 12 Brother; see No. 1, 23, where the first letter forms part of 
 Brother-gods. The word is here S,N,E ; CCOrf, brother, but with 
 a final vowel, which in Coptic would make it sister. But in 
 hieroglyphics this particular E is usually a masculine termination, 
 as to Son No. 1, 19; to Father No. 4, 4. It probably, like our 
 final E mute, did no more than lengthen the foregoing vowel. 
 The wine-bottle N, is in the large sculptures represented as 
 transparent, and as only half full ; and makes it probable that 
 the Egyptians had a name for wine like our own name, and the 
 Latin Vinum, and the Hebrew |", which would give its force to 
 that bottle as an N. Voc. 1837. 
 
 13 Loving; M; JUHl, to love. The character is EJUie, a plow 
 or hoe, and thus gains its force. Here we see that it is not always 
 from the first letter in the word that the character takes its force 
 as a letter, but from that which is most important. Had not the 
 Greeks translated these two words Philadelphus, or Brother-loving, 
 it would be more natural tb read, By brother beloved, as in the case 
 of No. 1, 16, and 17, where the adjective also follows the noun, 
 and is read By Pthah beloved. Voc. 1499. 
 
 14 On Day; E; egOOY, followed by a circle, the D.S. of time. 
 In No. 1, 1, the same D.S. was used for Year, and in No. 1, 3, 
 for Month. Voc. 1010. See Day, No. 13, 46. 
 
 15 That, the same; P,N, perhaps formed from the article ni 
 the; as No. 2, 1. It is a pronoun following the substantive. 
 
Like 2.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 31 
 
 and so used in No. 3, 26 and 15, 9 j whicli places quite establish 
 its meaning. Compare No. 13, 49, Our. 
 
 16 A Writing; S,SH,0,I, with theD.S. of a roll of papyrus tied 
 round with string; cd;)A.I to write. Voc. 331. The sitting man 
 is here simply the letter I ; compare Voc. 1982 and 1983. 
 
 17 The Chiefs; A,0,MR, plural; AAtpHY, the title of chief 
 bakers in the Book of Genesis. The first two letters are the in- 
 definite article OY ; see No. 34, 33, for the word in its more 
 simple form. Voc. 1328. 
 
 18 Of the Temples; M,E, plural. The M is for the syllable 
 Amun, the name of the god; E is HI, a house, in the plural 
 HOY houses ; hence Amuu-ei, a temple, or house of Amun. The 
 word Memnonium is Mi-amun-ei, the house of one loving Amun. 
 The letter E in this word resembles the ground plan of a house, 
 and is often used as the D.S. for Temple. The Egyptian temples 
 were of various ranks of holiness, and we shall find thi-ee ranks 
 spoken of in this Decree. This word embraces them all, including 
 those of the lower ranks, and hence perhaps the letter E must be 
 understood as the ground plan of a courtyard, which was less 
 holy than the building, as that was less holy than the inner cell. 
 Voc. 498. _ 
 
 19 High Priests; N0U,B; ItOYHB. a priest, s. woi- A formed, 
 not from ft OYT, god, as might be supposed from the hieroglyphics, 
 but from ItA. OYA.ii, belonging to what is holy. Hence while the 
 hieroglyphic seems related to No. 1, 29, it is not so etymologically. 
 Compare Voc. 298, 302. The word is repeated three tinies, 
 instead of adding the three strokes for the plural. In this way 
 the sculptor makes his work more ornamental. The club, as at 
 No. 1, 11, gains its force from Ro), wood. If, as is probable, 
 the various words for Priest, though translated alike in the Greek, 
 represent men of difi'erent rank, this word means the priests of 
 higher rank, while No. 1, "24, the man making a libation, is of 
 lower rank, or may be the more general word, including priests of 
 several kinds. See No. 12, 27 and 28, for further proof that this 
 title belongs to the priests of the highest rank. 
 
 20 Guardians of the temples, if we may read the characters 
 
32 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEEOGLYPHICS. [Link 2. 
 
 figuratively, while we are not helped by the Coptic language, or 
 the Greek translation. Anubis the jackal, is the servant of the 
 gods, and is here lying on the roof of the temple. 
 
 21 PuKiFiERSj the characters are a flame of fire and a vase of 
 water. Voc. 361. Compare No. 16, 23, where the D.S. for 
 water changes this word into Libations. 
 
 22 Perhaps Those who sing, or praise; S,EM,R,?,U; CJLtOV, 
 praise, and pco a mouth. The owl and arm are EM ; the fiower, 
 a doubtful character may be an 0, from OYtOl to cultivate. A 
 flower has that force at No. 32, 6. See No. 30, 13, for the same 
 word. 
 
 Line 3. 
 
 1 Hymns ; the bird is the word OVpO kinff, the perch on which 
 it stands is T, making together, OVpOT a hymn. The three dots 
 are the plural sign. Compare No. 3, 18, His majesty. 
 
 2 Perhaps Those who robe the gods. The principal character 
 is a collar to be placed on the statue. See No. 30, 15. 
 
 The latter characters in this word, SN and three dots, are a 
 very common plural ending in Hieroglyphics, but they are not 
 met with in Coptic. They may be CJtA.Y two, which would be 
 a very natural form in Hebrew, where the plural is understood to 
 mean Two, but little suitable here where the plural has always 
 three strokes, and where the dual is so frequently used, as in No. 
 1, 23 and 29 and 31. On the other hand, in other inscriptions 
 this termination is^ sometimes, though less frequently, spelt, TN 
 and three dots. See No. 27, 16. For this we might find a more 
 natural origin in the pronoun TN, which we often find following 
 a substantive, as at No. 24, 6. Or it may be the indefinite plural 
 article gA-H, prefixed in Coptic, but in hieroglyphics, as usual, 
 postfixed. In some few cases this plural termination is written 
 with SM, as perhaps No. 18, 12, and 32, 3. 
 
 3 Writers op the sacred books. This must be understood 
 as one word, because the plural sign covers the whole of it. The 
 characters are an inkstand or pallet, with a reed pen for Writing, 
 No. 15, 13 ; God, No. 5, 15 ; a roll of papyrus tied with a string, 
 and T,E, the end of the word. Book, and the D.S. of a man. 
 
Line 3.] EXPLANATION OP THE HIEKOGLYPHICS, 83 
 
 4 Prophet; R, CH; forming ipi, to do, and 3CCJU, speech. In 
 so rendering we are supported by the Greek. See Fame, No. 
 10, 23. 
 
 5 Others; CH,T,0, plural; KGT, other. Voc. 1127. See also 
 No. 5, 25, &o. 
 
 6 Divine ; NOU, T,F, plural ; ff OYTj god. The final F is q he, 
 and here seems to make the substantive into an adjective. 
 
 7 Probably Having purified themselves. The men seem to 
 be pouring holy water upon themselves. 
 
 8 Being assembled together; H,A,?,T,N,?; S,N, plural; formed 
 from -e-OVCUT, to assemble. If the lock of hair be qoi, hair, the 
 next syllable may be ItEq, a sailor, meaning that they came 
 down the Nile by boat. 
 
 9 Having come ; A,M. The feet are put on to the first letter as 
 figurative of motion ; and it may be from A.JUIE, to come. See 
 No. 24, 14. 
 
 10 The two provinces. The dual form of this word very much 
 restricts its meaning. See No. 18, 7. 
 
 11 Upper and Lower Egypt; the D.S. of the two countries, each 
 distinguished by its peculiar crown. That of Upper Egypt, with 
 a ball on the top, is in Exodus xxviii. 36, 37, called the Linen 
 Mitre, and that of Lower Egypt, the Bright Plate of gold, which 
 was put over the former. When so placed they together formed 
 the double crown called Pschent. 
 
 12 And ; A,0, A.YCU, as No. 2, 3 ; more probably OY, the in- 
 definite article, as in No. 5, 22. 
 
 13 Dius, the Macedonian month ; T,I,A,0,S. The letter D was 
 not known in Egypt. 
 
 14 Fifth day ; the circle, the D.S. of time, for the word Day, and 
 five strokes, the numeral. 
 
 15 The celebration. See No. 21, 16, and 2 1, 36. 
 
 16 Anniversary. The palm-branch is the word Year, as in 
 No. 1, 1. The dish is part of the word Assembly, meaning a Fes- 
 tival, No. 18, 32, &c. 
 
 17 Of ; the preposition as at No. 1, 25. 
 
 18 His majesty, is a convenient rendering of this group. It 
 
 D 
 
34 EXPLANATION OP THE HIEEOGLYPHICS. [LiNB 3. 
 
 contains the hawk with the whip of Osirisj which bird must be 
 distinguished from the vowel A, which we have already met with 
 so frequently. It is the word OVpO, king, and often the name 
 Horus. The sceptre in front we have seen in the word Reign, 
 No. 1, 11. The perch, a T, may make it a feminine word, while 
 the F, Cj, beneath, is the pronoun His. 
 
 19 Possibly Was cblebkated coNspicuorsLYj A,M; perhaps 
 eJUl, to remember, with the D.S. of a man placing a crown 
 on his head, which in this inscription is used for the word 
 conspicuous. See No. 38, 43, Celebrated, and No. ,37, jlS, con- 
 spicuous. In the Rosetta Stone this latter character means To 
 wear a crown, and is also part of the word Kingdom. 
 
 20 Likewise ; H,N,A, gm A.. Voc. 1273. 
 
 21 Upon ; S,S,0, CA.CA. ; the same as No. 1, 4, but with another 
 form of the 0. 
 
 22 The twenty-eipth day; with the circle, the D.S. for Day, 
 and the numerals as in No. 1, 7, and 29, 12. 
 
 23 Of; M, JU, the sign of the genitive case, or the preposition. 
 See No. 6, 26. 
 
 24 Month, being a moon followed by SO, T,T, perhaps JXJCXJKt, 
 to change, and the ring, the D.S. for time. The T,T, may stand 
 for the Coptic Kt, as the R,Il, stands for gp in No. 10, 26. 
 The star is very suitably chosen for an S in a word relating to 
 the heavenly bodies. 
 
 25 That, the same, as No. 2, 15. 
 
 It follows its substantive. Voc. 1376. 
 
 26 Received; possibly tyHn, to receive, as the second character is 
 a P. The first may be Ji)H, wood, meaning the wooden frame on 
 which a weaver stretches his threads. The last is an A, and may 
 be chosen symbolically, or it may be a D.S. 
 
 27 His Majesty, as No. 3, 18. It is the nominative case, 
 following the verb. 
 
 28 The Kingdom ; A, HOR, 0; OYpO, king ; with a character the 
 mark of an abstract idea. The bird is the royal bird, as in 
 No. 3, 18, and 27. The last character corresponds to the Coptic 
 prefix IXET, which changes OVpO into JU.6TOYpo, Kingdom ; 
 and Priest into Priesthood, in the Rosetta Stone. 
 
EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 35 
 
 Line i. 
 
 1 HiSjTjF; in the feminine, to agree with the word kingdom. 
 T is a feminine article, as in No. 1, 22, and 2, 5, and elsewhere 
 frequently. See No. 4, 5, for His in the masculine. 
 
 2 Gkeat, CH, RjT, Xtiupjj with the feminine article, as in the 
 last word. Voc. 1603. 
 
 3 From ; EM, EJUt j as No. 24, 35, where the vowel is of a 
 different form. This is the same preposition as No. 3, 23, where 
 it is written without the vowel. Voc. 1309. 
 
 4 Father ; T,F,E ; the word used on the Rosetta Stone. 
 Voc. 1817. See No. 15, 17. 
 
 5 His. F, Cj, the pronoun suffix. Compare No. 4, 1, where 
 this pronoun is in the feminine. 
 
 6 Having Celebrated ; A,M,0 ; possibly from EXll, to re- 
 member, as conjectured at No. 3, 19, and 19, 7. 
 
 7 Religious honours; T,0,T, with D.S, and S.N the plural 
 termination of No. 3, 2, but without the three strokes. From 
 •eOYCJUT, an image, and also a congregation. See No. 17, 32, 
 where the word is spelt rather differently, and No. 20, 22. Voc. 
 573. 
 
 8 In or Of, R or L. There is no authority in Coptic for a pre- 
 position of this form, but this letter seems to have that force also 
 on the Rosetta Stone, where we read very clearly " the blessings 
 of a kingdom remaining to himself and his children." But in 
 the Bashmuric dialect we have E^, the preposition to, borrowed 
 perhaps foom the Hebrew prefix, h. Voc. 1335. Or it may be 
 the common preposition EgpA.1, which elsewhere we find written 
 RR. 
 
 9 Temple, literally, Divine House, followed by T,E, HI, house, 
 with the feminine article. Thus the word is expressed first 
 pictorially, and then by a letter, which letter is itself the 'ground 
 plan of a house, or rather of a courtyard. Voc. 521. 
 
 10 Of; N,Tj WT ; the sign of the genitive. Voc, 1319. 
 
 11 Gods Euerget^, as No. 1, 31. 
 
 12 Which; N,T,E, rrXE. See No. 4, 10. The word is written 
 in Coptic with or without the final vowel. In the Rosetta 
 
 n2 
 
36 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEKOGLYPHICS. [Like 4. 
 
 Stone the preposition No. 4, 10, is spelt in this way. Voc. 
 1320. 
 
 13 In; M; EAJl, the sign of the genitive. But in Hieroglyphics 
 it seems to be a preposition with a very varying force of either 
 In, Of, or From. 
 
 14 CanopuSj so rendered in the Greek ; PjK,0,T, followed by T, 
 the feminine article, and then by the U.S. of a city. The city of 
 Canopus is on the coast, about fifteen miles from Alexandria, and 
 being at the mouth of the deepest branch of the Nile, it was 
 rising in wealth and population with the growth of foreign trade ; 
 but when Alexander built his new capital, the trade of Canopus 
 was stopped by an edict of Cleomenes, in favour of the Greeks of 
 Alexandria. Canopus, however, remained a place of importance, 
 and became the religious capital, and the centre of Egyptian 
 learning. The priests had declared that the Canopic branch of 
 the river, as being the deepest, was the Agathodseman, or river- 
 god. The jars with gods' heads, used in burial, were called 
 Canopic jars. There Euergetes built a temple to Osiris, and the 
 gold plate on which he dedicated to the god has lately been 
 found. When Christianity rose in Alexandria in the second 
 century, even the Greek paganism took refuge in Canopus. 
 Eunapius and Eufinus, in the fourth century, testify to Canopus 
 as being the seat of the ancient priestly learning, and of the 
 study of hieroglyphics, together with the practice of a variety of 
 magical and superstitious arts. All this very well agrees with its 
 being the city in which the representatives of the Egyptian priest- 
 hood met in Senate in the reign of Ptolemy Euergetes. 
 
 15 Declared; I,R,H,T,R; pgTOp, to urge, which is from 
 gTOp, force, preceded by ipi, to make. 
 
 16 This; N,T, as No. 4, 10, and 4, 12. 
 
 17 Decree ; SOT, N ; COYXerr, >s<. The rabbit has its name 
 from tfOJTg, to burrow ; and its name, spelt SOAT, is written 
 over a picture of the animal in Rosellini's " Monumenti Civile," 
 pi. 20. This word is used so frequently on this tablet, that 
 there can be no doubt about its meaning. Voc. 1692. See 
 
 = also the word COUTEJU, to hear. No. 31, 37. 
 
Line 4.J EXPLANATION OP THE HIEaOGLYPHlCS. 37 
 
 18, 19 King, as explained at No. 1, 13, and 13. 
 20 Ptolemy; see No. 1, 14. 
 21, 22 Living fok ever; see No. 1, 15, and 16. 
 23, 24 Beloved by Pthah; see No. 1, 17, and 18. 
 
 25 Son ; see No. 1,19. 
 
 26 Opj see No. 1, 8, and 20. 
 
 27 Ptolemy; see No. 1, 21. 
 
 28 And; see No. 1, 28, and 30. In the former sentence the 
 conjunction was omitted between No. 1, 21, and 22, 
 
 29 Arsinoe ; see No. 1, 22. 
 
 30 The Brother-gods ; see No. 1, 23. 
 
 31 LiKEvrisE; see No. 3, 20. 
 
 32 Qtjeen; three letters followed by the D.S. of a woman, 
 for which see No. 2, 4. Voc. 675. Without the final T, the 
 feminine article, this word would have been king, No. 10, 43, 
 Voc. 674. 
 
 33 Berenice; B,R,N,I,K,A, with T,S, the feminine article and 
 termination, as in No. 1, 22, and 4, 29. 
 
 34 His Sister, or more literally. Brother, as the feminine termi- 
 nation is wanting. See No. 8 , 40. Note, that Berenice was not 
 the king's sister, but was so stjded in compliment, as in Solomon's 
 Song the king styles his wife his sister. 
 
 35 Wife ; E,T, followed by the D.S., a figure which in this case 
 holds the ornament on her head. In Copic gAJ is a husband, to 
 which if we add the feminine article T, we get this word Wife. 
 Voc. 1833. 
 
 36 The Gods Euerget^. See No. 1, 31. 
 
 37 He; P,E; ITH ; He, but meaning They; the singular used 
 for the plural, as No. 24, 29. The Head, A.nE, has the force 
 of P. 
 
 38 Made; I,K. from ipi, to make. See No. 17, 33; and also 
 No. 1 6, 22, where the order of the letters is reversed. 
 
 39 Columns ; they are in the form of a papyrus stalk, with a bud 
 for the capital. 
 
 Line 5, 
 1 Expense ; K,N, plural ; KHff , fruit, income. This word bears 
 
38 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LiNB 5. 
 
 nearly the same meaning at No. 5, 40, and 9, 23, where it is 
 followed by an arm, the D.S. of receiving. 
 
 2 Great, in the plural ; see No. 4, 2, where it was in the 
 feminine singular. 
 
 3 For J M, a preposition, used with similar force at No. 5, 32, 
 though in the Coptic it is the sign of the genitive, meaning of. 
 
 4 The Temples, as No. 2, 18. 
 
 5 Of; N,E, ffA., belonging to. See No. 1, 8, and 20, where it is 
 spelt with an N only, and that of a different formj but see 
 No. 11, 17, and 7, 22. Voc. 1298. 
 
 6 Country; as No. 1, 10. 
 
 7 A,0 ; OY ; the indefinite article, as at No. 6, 21, where it is 
 equally not wanted. 
 
 8 Egypt, in one of the very various ways in which it is written. 
 The character above the figure of a country is at No. 17, 29, and 
 No. 17, 35, very distinctly translated At the public expense, as of 
 a festival. At No. 21, 44, it is equally distinctly Seasons of the 
 year. In other inscriptions it is a Sculptor, being written over a 
 man in that employment. What it represents is doubtful. But 
 if we may give to it the force Chem, for JjQHJUtI, Egypt, in this 
 place ; it may then be part of OYA.g,eJUl, or Suitable, when applied 
 to the festival ; and '&ISXI, to invent, when the title of the artist. 
 In what way it can mean the Seasons of the year is not clear. In 
 some such way we must try to reconcile seeming contradictions. 
 See also No. 8, 9, where our difficulty about this character is 
 further increased, and it has the force of Cham, but with another 
 meaning. 
 
 9 All; the adjective belonging to Temples, No. 5, 4. The 
 basket or dish without a handle is NEB, and must be distinguished 
 from the dish with a handle, which is K. The final T is not 
 found in the Coptic word fllRl, all, which this group represents. 
 
 10 He ; as No. 4, 37. 
 
 11 Prepared; from CHKj, a sword, which the two hands are 
 holding, we get CoKte, to prepare. The final R is ipi, to do. 
 See No. 25, 20, and 37, 34. 
 
 12 Possibly Obbliscs, or columns of another form from No, 4, 39. 
 
LiHB 6.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIBllOGLYPHICS. 39 
 
 13 Perhaps Colossal Statues ; P,P, plural, from A.c[)CJUc|>, 
 a giant. The Greek has only the general term Honours, in place 
 of these more definite objects. See No. 4, 37, where the human 
 head has the force of a P. At No. 27, 16, where this word is 
 again rendered Honours, it can hardly mean colossal statues. 
 
 14 For ; the preposition, as No. 1, 8. 
 
 15 The Gods. Here the hatchet has the force of NOUT, and is 
 followed by the vowel E, to make ftOYTE. In Voc. 371 the word 
 God is written with the hatchet and the letter T, giving to the 
 hatchet the force of NOU. This particular final E is in hiero- 
 glyphics very much confined to masculine words. 
 
 16 Probably Abundance ; R, SH,A, pety; if we are right in 
 giving to the second letter the force of SH, which we gave it in 
 the name of Euergetes, No. 1, 31. 
 
 17 Great, the adjective following its substantive. See No. 5, 2, 
 where this word was in the plural form, and No. 4, 2, where it 
 was in the feminine. 
 
 18 Probably Necessaries, or things fit ; SIOT, N ; COYTeff, 
 with S,N, the plural termination, as at No. 4, 7. The star may 
 be CltU^", the dog-star, and the first two characters are inter- 
 changeable with No. 4, 17. Voc. 1703. It is not usual for a 
 sculptor to use such ornamental characters as the S,Nj of this 
 word for. the unimportant grammatical termination. But it is 
 frequent throughout this tablet. 
 
 19 Possibly When behold; A,S,K; IC3CE, literally, £eAoM e/. 
 See No. 7, 30, and No, 20, 27. 
 
 20 He ; P,E ; nH ; the article for the pronoun, as No. 4, 37. 
 
 21 Possibly Supplied, or, according to the Greek, TooA care. See 
 No. 9, 3, where, with the addition of an R for ipi, to do, it may 
 be rendered Fed. Possibly from the word A.gCUp, treasures, 
 grain. 
 
 22 Yearly; T,R,B.R,E, which is the Coptic word 6Te2s.AJUini, 
 or eTepOJUini, the B being used for JLUTT ; and followed by pH.- 
 the sun, which is no more than the D.S. for time of No. 1,1. 
 See No. 15, 27 for this word, and No. 15, 8, for pH, used for 
 Time. With this use of B for MP we may compare that of 
 
40 EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LlNE 5. 
 
 NT for D, in the case of Darius spelt NTARIUS. Here is 
 well shown the uncertainty which hangs over the meaning of 
 hieroglyphics when they are not followed by a D.S. In Egypt : 
 Incrip. pi. 28j is a procession of nieUj each carrying a palm-branch, 
 and the name of the branch is spelt with the first characters in this 
 word yearly, T,R, for -©COpi, a branch, and the next character 
 for its D.S. See Voc. 485. 
 
 23 All. See No. 5, 9, where this word has a final T. See also 
 No. 29, 33. 
 
 >A The ; as No. 5, 30. 
 
 25 Other thinxjs ; as No. 3, 5. 
 
 26 The Bull Apis; H,A,P, followed by the D.S. 
 
 27 The Bull Mnevis ; E, for Eg,e, a bull, followed by CH, R, 
 2C(JUpi, great. Its more usual name, Mnevis, is a Greek corrup- 
 tion of Amun-ehe. Voc. 65. 
 
 28 Anb ; as No. 1, 28, and 30. 
 
 29 Animals, is required by the Greek. The finger THR, with 
 E,0, plural, may be TKflOOVe, an animal. 
 
 30 Temples, the building, with the word God upon it. 
 
 31 He regulated ; it is so translated on the Rosetta Stone. 
 Without the first character this is the word Steersman, written 
 over the man in some sculptures. Voc. 1748 and 1746. 
 
 32 In; or For; see No. 5, 3, and 6, 26. 
 
 33 Cities ; B,K, &A.KI, but without the D.S. or the sign of the 
 plural ; as No. 18, 9. 
 
 34 Egypt ; Voc. 798. From the eyebrow, and eyelids blackened 
 with paint, according to the custom of the Egyptian ladies, we 
 get the word ^A.iU,e, blach, which represents 5(^HJUl.l, Egypt. 
 The tear-drops may be caused from the pain which accompanied 
 the operation of painting. The word is followed by the D.S. of 
 a city, strictly speaking, but often used for a country. 
 
 35 Gifts. The pyramid in the hand is T^Y, a hill, and represents 
 THl, to give, while the whole is symbolical of the act of giving. 
 It is followed by S,N, the plural termination. 
 
 36 Other, or various ; see No. 3, 5, and 5, 25. The adjective 
 following its substantive. 
 
Line 5.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROeLYPHICS. 41 
 
 37 GreaTj in the plural ; the adjective following the suhstantive. 
 See No. 5, 2. 
 
 38 Perhaps Excellent; S,P,T, CA-HT. If this is an adjective, it 
 precedes its substantive. 
 
 39 Gift. The hill TAV, as held in the hand at No. 5, 35. 
 
 40 Kevenues may be the meaning of this word, which differs 
 from No. 5, 1, in being followed by an arm, which is not in the 
 act of giving, but is the same as that used in the words Received, 
 No. 3, 26, and Captured, No. 6, 5. 
 
 Line 6. 
 
 1 And ; A,0, AOUV, as No. 2, 3. These characters, at No. 5, 
 22, and often elsewhere^ we read as OY, the indefinite article; 
 but here, before a verb, that article would be out of place. 
 
 2 That he might make ; I,T, EO, e-&po. The 6 is the prefix 
 of the subjunctive mood to the word ■©■po. The mouth po, is 
 either R, or RO. 
 
 3 Reconquest ; E,M,K,R,0, plural, S,N ; from Xpo, to conquer. 
 The EM is the prefix of the noun's case. The SN is a very 
 unnecessary second plural termination, or rather, should have been 
 placed before the three dots. See No. 10, 29, and 10, 41, where 
 we also have this peculiarity. Note the difference between the K 
 in this word and the N in No. 6, 30. 
 
 4 Sacked images, so translated at No. 34, 3. It is formed of 
 the hatchet for Sacred, see God, No. 5, 15 ; the systrum, the 
 musical instrument used by the priestesses, and the D.S. of the 
 statues. 
 
 5 _ Captured ; T,A,N, TOUOVrf , to carry off. The two legs are 
 introduced to represent the action symbolically, see No. 6, 14 ; 
 and the arm, the vowel, may have been chosen out of a variety of 
 forms for the same reason ; see No. 3, 26. 
 
 6 Barbarians, may be the meaning given to the rude figure here 
 used as the D.S. The letters are A,S, A.{:y6, a multitude. 
 
 7 Of; as No. 5, 5. 
 
 8 Persia; P,R,S,T,T, with D.S. of land. See No. 6, 17, for 
 the same D.S. See the same S in Dius, No. 3, 13. 
 
 9 He MADE war; R,R, MAS; egpHl, to make war, UIIU}E, 
 
42 EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LlSE 6. 
 
 battle. The unfledged bird is AJtA.C, wliicli gives us the sound 
 required. See No. 7, 4. In this case the R,K., of the Hierogly- 
 phics represent the Coptic HR ; as in Greek, where of the two 
 R's the former carries the aspirate. 
 
 10 Possibly On behalf of. But this is doubtful. See, however, 
 No. 7, 5, where we can give it the same meaning. 
 
 11 Cities; as No. 5, 33. 
 
 12 Egypt ; as No. 5, 34. 
 
 13 With GOOD fortune. See No. 6, 31, and ll, 10, where we 
 safely give it this meaning. On the Rosetta Stone it is translated 
 Power ; Voc. 1451. But Good fortune ■w'\]\ be seen to be its more 
 literal rendering. It seems to be a compound character. The 
 upright part may be T, see No. 13, 2 ; the lower part is an A; 
 the line across it may be an 0, see No. 13, 13 ; and the whole 
 may be from TAOVO, to send, to produce ; to fall down, to cast 
 down, which approaches our word Accident, and Fortune. 
 
 14 Perhaps Plundered, or perhaps plundering ; A,T,N, from 
 inj, to bring, with T, the feminine article, as the nominative case 
 to this verb ends with a T, and may very possibly be of the femi- 
 nine gender. The form of the T may be chosen to represent 
 motion. 
 
 15 His Majesty, as No. 3, 18, being the nominative to the fore- 
 going verb. The first character we have seen as part of the word 
 i?e«^«, No. 1, 11. The bird is the word OVpO, king. The perch, 
 T, makes it probable that the noun is feminine; it changes the 
 word King into Majesty ; and we see it in the more lengthened 
 word jmnTEpO, kingdom, which in Coptic is a feminine noun. 
 The perch is chosen for a T, as a suitable character to accompany 
 the bird. 
 
 16 Possibly, The fields of other lands. The first character is 
 the moon, lOg; it may represent lOgl, the fields. It is followed 
 by TO, K,E; -G-O, the world, and KB, foreign, or other. 
 
 17 Foreign countries. The first character is of doubtful force. 
 It is the ornamental collar of No. 3, 2. If it is JUIA.1A.KH, 
 a collar, it may be used to represent the two words XIA.1, a place, 
 and KE, foreign. The last character is the usual D.S. for a 
 country. 
 
Line 6.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 43 
 
 18 Foe or unto, as No. 1, 8, and 5, 14. 
 
 19 The Conspicuous glory. E,0, is BOOT, glory ; the sitting 
 figure, holding an ornameut on the head, is translated conspicuous 
 at No. 37, 18; the S which follows it is the sign of the feminine, 
 prefixed in Coptic, but here postfixed to the adjective; and the 
 plural sign treats the whole as one word. 
 
 20 The PROSPERITY ; N,N,F, with S plural, where we should look 
 for S,N, plural ; from it A.rteq, good. 
 
 21 Of the COUNTRY, as No. 1, 10, and 5, 6, but preceded by the 
 indefinite article, where the definite seems wanted, as Egypt is 
 the country meant. See the article at No. 5, 22. 
 
 22 He gave; R,T,T. From TTHI, a ^«/#, with T the feminine 
 article postfixed, and preceded by ipi, to do, which makes the 
 substantive into a verb. 
 
 23 Them; N,F,S, plural, where as in No. 6, 20, we should 
 have looked for S,N, plural. From ItAC], to him, made into to 
 them by the plural signs. 
 
 24 Unto; R, a preposition as No. 4, 8; borrowed, as may be 
 supposed, from the Hebrew. 
 
 25 Palaces, or houses with a throne ; the throne, the letter T the 
 feminine article, the D.S. for a house, and S,N, for the plural. 
 
 26 Or; M ; iX, the sign of the genitive case, as at No. 3, 23. 
 
 27 The Temples ; as No. 2, 18. 
 
 28 Which had been robbed ; M,N,M,N,T, with S,N, for the 
 plural ; from JUOmortT, not having^ 
 
 29 Perhaps, Who or they ; A,M ; gA.rf, gGIt, or sometimes spelt 
 gEJU., the plural article. See No. 15, 2, and 15, 36, where this 
 word takes a plural termination, in the last of which places its 
 meaning seems pretty well fixed by the Greek. 
 
 30 Having made to spring up, or having added; N,R; R, TE. 
 From PHT, to spring up, preceded by Wepe, the prefix for the im- 
 perfect tense of the verb. See No. 14, 35, and 36, and No. 22, 
 18, where the verb has a different prefix. We must distinguish 
 between our first letter, an N, and the K in the name of Berenice ; 
 though in several places in this inscription the distinction is lost, 
 by the filling up of the hollow in the carving. 
 
44 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LwE 6. 
 
 31 Good fortune^ as No. 6, 13 j but here preceded by S, as 
 No. 10, 15; for which the reason is not obvious. 
 
 32 Joy J 0,N,F; ovrfoq. 
 
 33 Egypt; K,Mj with T the feminine article, and the D.S. for a 
 country. See No. 8, 31, and 32, where these letters, though of 
 a different form, are used in the two words of the same meaning. 
 
 34 Probably, Rejoicing, The flower g^H^^I may represent 
 OYge^^E, a song. The R may be ipi, to do, which makes the 
 substantive into a verb. 
 
 Line 7. 
 
 1 Praises ; A,A,A,A; ^IA.1, to magnify : see No. 34, 28, where 
 the word is in a more simple form; also Voc. 372 and 1449. 
 
 2 He; as No. 5, 10. 
 
 3 Fought ; the two arms of a warrior, with sword and shield in 
 his hands. Voc. 1777. 
 
 4 Made war ; as No. 6, 9. 
 
 5 Perhaps, On uehalf of, as conjectured at No. 6, 10. But 
 here our unknown word has a plural termination, SM, instead of 
 the more used SN. See No. 18, 12, and 32, 3, for other cases 
 of such termination. The change between M and N if frequent. 
 Our first letter does not seem to be the same as the S of 
 No. 9, 21. 
 
 6 The BURIAL PLACES, literally, Amenti, the supposed place of 
 the dead; A,M,N,T,T, with D.S. of country. 
 
 7 The ; P, ITE ; see No. 5, 24, where, however, the P is followed 
 by the vowel. 
 
 8 Hated ones ; R,B,T ; RcOTE, hated, preceded by some part 
 of the verb ipi, to do. The second character is often used as a P, 
 or B, in the word Anubis ; Voc. 139. 
 
 9 And ; see No. 1, 28. 
 
 10 Lands; the D.S. of No. 6, 17, repeated three times. 
 
 11 Barbarians; the D.S. of No. 6, 6. In these cases the 
 sculptor shortens his work by omitting either the letter or the 
 D.S. when the word occurs a second time. 
 
 12 Probably, Numerous; see No, 10, 8, where it will bear the 
 
Line 7.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 45 
 
 same meaning. A reptile from tOtyi"j to creep, may give us the 
 word UJUJ, numerous. 
 
 13 He CUT OFFj T,R, from Ttope, an axe. But see No. 18, 8, 
 where these letters mean THp, All. 
 
 14 Heads ; represented pictorially, and repeated three times for 
 the plural. 
 
 15 The Barbarians ; the D.S. as at No. 7, W, followed by three 
 dots, and S,N, the double plural termination. There are places 
 in this inscription where these letters S,N, might be supposed to 
 be the pronoun Their ; but in such cases as this, and No. 8, 2, 
 No. 9, 4, and others, such a meaning is unallowable. 
 
 16 Those who govern them, is required by the Greek, 
 CH, Il,P,?jS,N, plural. The first two characters are XCXjpi, 
 powerful; the fourth is doubtful. 
 
 17 Just laws ; being the plural of No. 4, 17. 
 
 18 He ; the article for the pronoun, as No. 7, 2. 
 
 19 Upheld, is required by the Greek, but the fourth character is 
 doubtful. The word may perhaps be 0,H,A; Ogl, to uphold, 
 with the D.S. of a support of some kind. 
 
 20 The INHABITANTS, literally, the living men and women; the 
 character for Life; see No.], 16, followed by the D.S. The 
 woman is known from the man in this inscription by the orna- 
 ment on her head j see No. 2, 4. Whenever throughout this 
 decree the Greek writer wrote the word Inhabitants, or spoke of 
 the people in general terms, the Egyptian scribe changed it into 
 Men and Women ; thus showing in the clearest way the higher 
 rank that the women held in Egypt, compared with their sisters 
 in Greece. 
 
 21 All; as at No. 5, 9, the adjective to the foregoing noun. 
 
 22 Op or belonging to; see No. 5, 5, and 11, 17. 
 
 23 The country, meaning, as it would seem, Egypt. But compare 
 No. 6, 17. 
 
 24 And,- as at No. 1, 30. 
 
 25 Other lands, as No. 6, 16. 
 
 26 Men and Women ; the D.S. of No. 7, 20. 
 
 27 All, as No. 7, 21. 
 
46 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 7. 
 
 28 Under j M,N,HjI, CHjN, which seems to be compounded of 
 the prepositions JUierf, with, and ^A.2CErf, before. Compare 
 No. 32, 4 and 5. 
 
 29 Dominion j the plural of the word rendered Majesty at 
 No. 3j 18, and 27. Here, as might be expected, we have not got 
 
 = the pronoun His. 
 
 30 Behold, when; as No. 5, 19. 
 
 31 It came to pass; R,E,F; from ipi, to do, the auxiliary verb 
 of action. REF is very exactly eqipi, it was done, with the 
 pronoun F at the end of the word, as is usual in the hieroglyphics, 
 not at the beginning, where it is placed in Coptic. See No. 13, 45, 
 and 22, 6, where the same word is spelt rather differently. 
 
 32 Upon; H,R, egpAl; as at No. 13, 22, and 24, 31. In 
 other inscriptions these two letters are sometimes the name of the 
 god Horus ; see Voc. 119; and the first letter, when repeated, 
 forms the word %0, the world, in the place of the second letter in 
 our word No. 23, 37; see Voc. 705. Our preposition is derived 
 from gpA., the face, which in Coptic forms part of a variety of 
 prepositions, as do the words Hand, Head, and Mouth. The 
 force of the letters is well proved when they occur joined with 
 others; as No. 10, 33, rfA.gp«S., Hereafter; No. 11,38, and 13, 1, 
 giperr, For; No. 15, 33, gipeJU, Before, and No. 12, 40, 
 and 15, 40, CA.gpe, Upon, Within. No. 8, 12, and 22, 3 can 
 be better understood as Event, being the substantive giP*-' * 
 face. 
 
 33 Year, of the seasons ; tviauTo;, not sto^, the civil year, No. 1, 1. 
 See No. 15, 29. 
 
 34 Of, see No. 1, 8, and 5, 14. 
 
 35 The Nile ; H,A,P, MO. The last syllable is JUIOOY, 7vater. 
 HAP, though more usually HAM, is a prefix by which ftOVfi., 
 gold, becomes gA-AAftOYR, and gA.nrfOYR, a goldsmith ; eye, 
 wood, becomes gA.AAcye, a carpenter ; so our word Hap-mou, 
 means a Waterman. Voc. 183. See No. 8, 29. 
 
 36 It failed; N,T,S, CH,M ; rtTE, the prefix of the verb, and 
 C^^^tX, to fail, or, as the Greek says, to rise insufficiently. 
 
EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 47 
 
 Line 8. 
 
 1 Day J E,A,0; GgOOY. See No. 13, 13, where this word is 
 written with two letters, and No. 13, 46, where it has only one 
 letter ; but the less careful spelling is supplied in those cases by 
 the addition of the D.S. 
 
 2 Seasons, or times. The meaning of this word is fixed very 
 satisfactorily by No. 8, 23, and the first letter we treated as a P, 
 or B, at No. 7, 8, and 23, 12. It may be AP time, a word which 
 we find in A.n&C, old, compounded of AC, old; and also in 
 A-npHTG, long ago, compounded of pHT, to rise, or raise. It 
 is followed by the ring, the D.S. of time, as at No. 1, 1, and 3 ; 
 and then by S,N, the plural termination. 
 
 3 KiGHT J see No. 7, 17, Justice ; and No. 4, 17, Decree. 
 
 4 The inhabitants. See No. 7, 20. 
 
 5 All, the adjective following its substantive. See No. 7, 21. 
 
 6 Op, see No. 7, 22, and 5, 5. 
 
 7 Cities; B,K; RakI, with the usual D.S. Toe. 813. See 
 No. 6, 11. 
 
 8 Those; N,E; Itl, the plural definite article, followed by S,N, 
 as the plural termination. See No. 20, 8, where we give a very diffe- 
 rent meaning to a similar word. But as the N is there a different 
 character, it probably carried with it a difi'erent vowel's sound. 
 
 9 Struck down. At No. 5, 8, we have seen reason for thinking 
 this character has the force of CHEM. Here the Greek requires 
 Struck down, for which we find in Coptic ^OJUl^eXIl, the half 
 of which reduplicate word will very well satisfy our requirements, 
 both as to sound and as to meaning, and particularly if we may 
 join that half to the next word, and thus make a reduplicate word 
 of our own. Such compound words are so far common in Coptic, 
 as to make our conjecture not unreasonable. 
 
 10 Cast down; N, CH; fte2C. 
 
 11 The. See No. 5, 24, and No. 9, 6. 
 
 12 Event, as No. 22, 3 ; H,R ; gp*-, face, a word used as part 
 of the prepositions EgpA., against, and rf AgpA, upon, and thus 
 itself is the object towards which or from which motion is directed. 
 See No. 7, 32, where the use of this word is explained. 
 
48 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHTCS. [Line 8. 
 
 13 When Behold, is the rendering that we gaye to this word at 
 No. 7, 30. 
 
 14 M, the prefix of the infinitive moodj to the next word. See 
 No. 18, 20, and No. 18, 25. 
 
 15 The Happening; S, CH,N. This word seems to be akin to 
 CA-^eiUl, to fail. See No. 7, 36, where the characters are difierent, 
 and it ends with M, not N. In many languages an accident, and 
 fortune, are ambiguous words, and mean either good or bad. See 
 No. 8, 27, and 13, 23 for other places where this word is used.. 
 
 16 By FORTUNE, or by accident. This word is on the Eosetta 
 Stone translated Good fortune. Voc. 157. It has the same 
 ambiguity as the last word. See No. 13, 24. See also No. 
 30, 19, where this cbaracter bears its original meaning of Two 
 arms holding, and where a possible explanation is ofiered for its 
 secondary meaning in this place. 
 
 17 Evil; CH, F,T,E j 2CCXjq; the adjective to the foregoing 
 substantive. Compare No. 26, 20, Avenger, or Next of kin. 
 
 18 Having read ; S, SH,A,0 ; C^A.1, writing; followed by a man 
 with his hand to his mouth for the act of speaking, for the word 
 pu), mouth, and then by S,N, to put the whole into the plural. 
 We may compare this with the Hebrew, in which the word for 
 Reading, means to Read aloud, namely, X'np, to call out. Our 
 word means to speak the writing. 
 
 19 Destructions; CH, R,!, followed by D.S. of men thrown 
 down. From XCAjpi, powerful. With the adverb after it we have 
 in Coptic, XOp eRo^, destruction. The D.S. makes the adverb 
 less necessary. 
 
 20 Perhaps Once upon a time; CH, P; ^(jun, hidden, like the 
 Hebrew oby, hidden, which has the same two meanings as the 
 Latin Olim, formerly, and hereafter. See No. 21, 6, and 21, 49, 
 where it bears the same meaning. 
 
 21 Happiness; EI10,T,T; epOYOT. See No. 13, 48, where it 
 has the same meaning. The four jars have their force from their 
 known contents, EpcOTG, milk ; and the T,T, seem not wanted. 
 The second may be the feminine article. These, jars form the 
 first syllable of the well-known title of Osiris, Ro-t-amenti, king 
 
Like 8.] explanation of the hiekoglyphics. 49 
 
 of Amenti, which the Greeks wrote as Rhadamanthus. But see 
 No. 25j 13, and No. 37, 24, where this same word is shown equally 
 clearly to mean principal or of first rank. Such is the ambiguity 
 attaching to this mode of writing, and which the scribes made no 
 attempt to remove. The reason why they rested satisfied is pretty 
 clear. They never meant to employ it on subjects requiring 
 logical exactness. 
 
 22 Befallen j M,R,K ; from pEK, to how down, with XX, the prefix 
 of the infinitive mood ; as No. 8, 14. 
 
 23 Time ; see No. 8, 2, where this word is in the plural. 
 
 24 Kings of Upper Egypt. See No. 1, 12, where we have the 
 double title. The figure wears the crown of the Upper Province. 
 See No. 3, 11. Very possibly the native sovereigns, the Kings of 
 Thebes, are here more particularly pointed to. 
 
 25 Chiefs; A,P,A, with the plural sign ; ^TIB, head. 
 
 26 Upon ; as No. 7, 32, although the order of the letters is 
 reversed. But in the case of H^R, with no vowel between them, 
 the change of place of the two letters cannot be very important 
 to the second. In the Greek we have £f' av, meaning Under 
 whom, but here we have no pronoun. See No. 8, 12, where we 
 render it An event. 
 
 27 It HAPPENED. See No. 8, 15. 
 
 28 By FORTUNE, or accident; see No. 8, 16. 
 
 29 The Nile ; see No. 7, 35. 
 
 30 Failed, or rose insufficiently. See No. 7, 36, where this 
 group ends with an M, not N, but is in every other respect 
 written with the same characters. This connects the word 
 No. 7, 36, with No. 8, 15, in which the characters employed 
 are so difierent. 
 
 31, 32 The Egyptians, of the country. See No. 1, 9, and 
 10, where these two words are thus united. Also Voc. 776. 
 
 33 In ; M ; as No. 1 7, 3. See No. 6, 3, where a difi'erent form 
 of the letter is used. 
 
 34 Day; as No. 8, 1, though it wants the final vowel. 
 
 35 Seasons ; as No. 8, 2. 
 
 36 And ; as No. 2, 3, and 6, 1. 
 
 e 
 
50 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LlNB 8. 
 
 37 His Majesty ; as No. 3, 27. 
 
 38 May he be praised ; H,S,F ; gCUC, to celebrate, followed by 
 Cj, in Coptic tlie prefix for the third person singular of the verb. 
 See the use of the q at No. 13, 45. 
 
 39 And; see No. 1, 28. 
 
 40 Sister ; S,N,E ; literally Brother ; for we must not compare 
 it to COrtI, Sister, for want of the feminine termination. See 
 No. 4, 34. The feminine termination is supplied by the D.S. 
 
 Line 9. 
 
 1 D.S. for the queen and king; the usual order of the two 
 being reversed. See No. 2, 4, for the D.S. of a woman. 
 
 2 He; the article used for the pronoun, as No. 5, 10. And 
 here, as there, the pronoun in the singular is used for the two 
 sovereigns. 
 
 3 Probably Fed; see No. 5, 21 ; where, however, we have 
 rendered these two words. The food. 
 
 4 Those ; N,E, with S,N, for the plural. See No. 8, 8, where 
 this word is written with an N of a difierent form. 
 
 5 Who burn incense ; M, SH, followed by the pot of incense 
 with a flame rising from it. The M is the prefix which makes 
 the verb into a participle. SH represents the compound word 
 cyoYcytOOYtyi, to burn incense. See the force of the SH at 
 No. 1, 31. 
 
 6 The, as No. 8, 11. 
 
 7 Egyptian, used as a plural adjective ; see No. 1, 9, and 8, 31. 
 
 8 Temples, or Divine houses. The word God is used as an 
 adjective; see No. 12, 11 ; the D.S. for House, as at No. 28, 34, 
 is repeated three times. 
 
 9 Likewise; seeNo. 4, 31. 
 
 10 Various, or Other; CH, plural; KOOV. But see No. 1,9, 
 where it is a contraction of ^(JHXll, No. 8, 31. 
 
 11 Cities; as No. 5, 33. 
 13 Egypt; as No. 6, 12. 
 
 13 Probably Times. It may be the word OYrfCUOYI, hours. 
 See No. 12, 16, and 13, 7, which support this meaning to the 
 word. But the force of the third letter is uncertain. 
 
Lines.] explanation OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS, 51 
 
 14 Appointed ; being the word translated Just Laws at No. 7, 17, 
 but with different form of the S,N, the plural termination. 
 
 15 He ; the article for the pronoun, as No. 4, 37. 
 
 16 Remitted ; according to the Greek ; S,A, ? ,0, followed by the 
 man. with hand to his mouth, RO, possibly some part of the 
 ■auxiliary verb ipi, to do. See No. 11, 40, and Voc. for this form 
 of the S. It may be CA.gU), to make to cease ; but the force of 
 the third letter is uncertain. 
 
 17 Numerous, as No. 7, 12. 
 
 18 Probably Seed, meaning the tax on corn taken in kind; 
 CH, A ; 2CO, seed, or 3CA., to sow. 
 
 19 He; as No. 9, 15. 
 
 20 Gave; R,T,T; T"T" is one form of the verb THI, to give; 
 the R is part of the auxiliary verb ipi. The pyramid in the 
 hand is the letter T, as No. 5, 39. Compare Gifts, No. 5, 35. The 
 arm is symbolical of the action. This may also mean He remitted. 
 
 21 Thousands, or Hundreds ; S, with the plural termination 
 SjN ; tye, a hundred, or jyo, a thousand. 
 
 22 Perhaps Necessaries. First we have A,0, the indefinite 
 article OY ; then H,T,R, gTOp, necessary. But the following 
 characters, which form the word Years, and Palm branches, do 
 not well agree with this. See No. 1, 1, year, and No. 5, 22, 
 yearly i which both resemble this group of letters. The fruit of 
 the palm tree was not so abundant, as likely to be here mentioned. 
 
 23 ExpENCEs, as No. 5, 40. 
 
 24 For; the preposition, as No. 1, 8, and 13, 40. 
 
 25 The GOOD ; N,E,N ; ff A.rfe. 
 
 26 Welfare. The second character is Life, as No. 1,15. The 
 bird may be the fabulous phoenix. 
 
 27 Of Men and Women; the D.S. followed by three dots for the 
 plural. 
 
 28 Probably Each, or singly; A,0, with S,N, for the plural; 
 perhaps OVA., single. See No. 23, 20. 
 
 29 He ; the article for the pronoun,^ as No. 9, 2. 
 
 30 Gave ; being the same as No. 9, 20, but without the arm. 
 
 31 Probably Wheat, agreeably to the Greek, more literally Good 
 
 E 2 
 
52 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEKOGLYPHICS. [Ll™ 9- 
 
 corn; N,N,0, for rfA.rfOY, good; T perhaps the feminine article, 
 and the plow as the D.S. with the plural sign. 
 
 32 To Egypt, as No. 6, 33, preceded by the indefinite article. 
 
 33 From ; M, JLS., the sign of the genitive case, as 3, 23, and 6, 3. 
 
 34 The Syrians, according to the Greek ; K,T,N,N,0, with T,T, 
 and the D.S. for Land. The Rotenno are often mentioned in the 
 inscriptions relating to the Egyptian wars. 
 
 35 Some unknown City, which may qualify the preceding word ; 
 as it is not probable that whenever the Rotenno are mentioned 
 Syrians are meant. It was, perhaps, one of the ports on the 
 Syrian coast. Our first letter is used at No. 26, 18, where its 
 force is equally uncertain. The other letters are B,T,K, for B.A.KI, 
 city, with T the feminine article placed before the last letter of 
 the word, as is not unusual. 
 
 36 From ; as No. 9, 33. 
 
 37 The LAND ; T,0, as at No. 6, 16, and the first part of No. 1, 10, 
 though with a different form of the vowel. 
 
 38 Of; as No. 1, 8. 
 
 39 Caphtor, in the Greek, Phenicia. This was the land of the 
 Philistines, called the Caphtorites in Deuteronomy ii., 23 ; hut it 
 is not the island of Caphtor spoken of in Jeremiah xlvii., 4, from 
 which the Philistines came forth, as also is said in Genesis x., 14. 
 That was probably one of the large islands on the east side of the 
 Delta, in the fork of two branches of the Nile. It is spelt K,F,T, 
 followed T,T, and the D.S. for a country. 
 
 40 From ; as No. 9, 33, but with a different form of the M. 
 
 41 The FOREIGN ISLAND. The D.S. of an island is followed by the 
 adjective K,E ; KG foreign. See No. 6, 16. 
 
 42 Of; N,T; rfTE. For the force of the two legs as T, see 
 No. 10, 12; also No. 6,28. 
 
 43 Cyprus, according to the Greek; B,A,A,N,A,A; REffrtEj 
 a palm tree, in Greek Phoenix, whence its inhabitants, as also those 
 of the neighbouring country, were named Phenicians. The force 
 of the T,T, before the D.S. for Land, is doubtful. See No. 9, 34, 
 and 39. 
 
 44 Which ; NTE ; rfT6, ftT, or rteT. 
 
Line 10.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS, 53 
 
 45 In ; the same preposition and character as No. 9, 40, there 
 translated From. 
 
 46 The name, as it would seem, of the Mediterranean Sea. But the 
 
 meaning is very doubtful. 
 
 Line 10. 
 
 1 The GREAT SEA j CH, probably for XCOpi, great ; and M, for 
 JLtCXJOY, wafer. In Isaiah, xxiii., 3, the Mediterranean is called 
 the Great Waters. 
 
 2 Likewise, as No. 4, 31. 
 
 3 Countries; the D.S. of No. 9, 34, followed by T, and the 
 plural sign. 
 
 4 Great; in the plural, to agree with the foregoing. See 
 No. 5, 2. 
 
 5 He ; the article for the pronoun, as No. 4, 37, and 9, 29. 
 
 6 Gave ; as No. 9, 30. 
 
 7 Silver vessels. The first character may be gA.T, silver. 
 The second is the D.S. In the Eosetta Stone, line 4, these two 
 characters are united. 
 
 8 Numerous, as No. 7, 12. 
 
 9 The indefinite article, as at No. 9, 22, and 9, 32. 
 
 10 The Greek does not help us to the meaning of this plural 
 substantive, of which the first character is unknown. 
 
 11 Leeks^ the common food of the country; T,S, ISI; ^HS^a 
 plant, and H6e, a leak. The throne, in Coptic gEAACI, is softened 
 into ISI, as we see in the name of the goddess Isis. The resem- 
 blance in sound, between the name of the goddess and the leek, 
 made the leek a sacred plant. See Juvenal, who was told that 
 Egyptians might not eat it : — 
 
 Porrum et cepe nefas violare, ac frangere morsu. 
 
 sanctas gentes, quibus hgec nascimtur in hortis 
 
 Numina. Sat. xt. 9—11. 
 
 ] 2 Seed or grain; S,T, CA.T, preceded by the indefinite article, OY. 
 
 13 Spelt; B,A,T, plural; B.tO'i", jspeZ^ ; or at least the grain 
 mentioned in Exodus ix,, 32, whatever its name may have been. 
 
 14 The, the article, as No. 5, 24. 
 
 15 Good fortune; as No. 6, 31. See No. 6, 13, and 11, 10, 
 where this word has not the prefix S. 
 
54 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Lmb 10. 
 
 16 Of the inhabitants; as No. 7, 20; literally, living men am 
 women. 
 
 17 Decree ; see No. 4, 17 ; but here the Greek does not help us, 
 and there are four words to which we can give no exact meaning, 
 except by supposing that they are out of place. 
 
 18 Pkom ; the preposition M, iX, as No, 9, 36, 
 
 19 The Land, as No. 9, 37, and 7, 25. 
 
 20 Some City or country ; but for this and the three preceding 
 words we have nothing in the Greek. 
 
 21 He ; the article for the pronoun, as No. 10, 5. 
 
 22 Gave ; as No. 1 0, 6 ; but meaning, according to the Greek, he 
 left behind him. 
 
 23 Fame ; R, CH,0, with S,N, for the plural ; 2CaJ, to talk,_ with 
 the auxiliary ipi, to act. See Prophet, or Speaker, No. 3, 4, 
 
 24 Without end ; M,N, CH ; JUlJUlIt 2CU). 
 
 25 Of BENEVOLENCE ; being the word used in the king's name 
 Euergetes, with S,N, for the plural. The letter is SH, for LyA.Y, 
 benevolence. 
 
 26 Foa or unto ; R,R,E,A ; EgpHJ, unto. Here we have a double 
 R, for HR, as in No. 6, 9, &c. 
 
 27 Ever; as No. 1, 16. 
 
 28 Likewise ; , as No. 4, 31 . 
 
 29 They will talk ; S,P, CH, three dots, and S,N, for the plural, 
 perhaps from TTEXe, to say, preceded by S, which may be the future 
 sign. In Coptic, Crf A. is the prefix for the future, and we have no 
 authority to treat S alone as such ; but we shall see so many cases 
 in this inscription in which it is so used, as quite to justify our so 
 treating it. 
 
 30 Revenues, or expence ; as No. 5, 40. 
 
 31 Among, or to; as No. 4, 13, and 16, 31. But here, in the 
 Vienna copy, the character is reversed, as it would seem, in mis- 
 take. It may be corrected by the help of Dr. Lepsius's copy. 
 
 32 The, the article, as No. 5, 24, and 10, 14. 
 
 33 Hbreaptee, is required by the Greek; N,H,R, probably 
 ItA.gpA.) upon. See No. 7, 32, for the force of the second letter, 
 and an explanation of the word. 
 
Line 10.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEHOGLYPHICS. 55 
 
 34 Men and Women, as No. 7, 26. 
 
 35 And, as No. 8, 39, &c. 
 
 36 So MANY things; A,P,E,S, with S,N, for the plural; A.nc, 
 a number, and in the plural, so many. In the Greek we have, 
 " In return for which." 
 
 37 A GIFT ; see Gave, No. 10, 22, &c. 
 
 38 From ; see Of, No. 1, 8, &e. 
 
 39 The GODS ; as No. 5, 15. Such is the obscurity of this mode 
 of writing, that we might have rendered this, " A gift to the 
 gods," if the Greek had not cleared up the doubt. 
 
 40 Established; S,M,N,T; CJLtrtT. See No. 13, 2, for the 
 letter T. But also see No. 20, 39, where the same letters, vary- 
 ing only in the form of the S, must be read as Shall not have. 
 
 41 The high office ; A, HOR,0,?,T, three dots, and S,N, for the 
 plural. The bird is not A, but HOR, as at No. 3, 27. The 
 unknown character and the T represent the Coptic prefix, JUlE-e-, 
 which is here postfixed. It makes a concrete noun into an 
 abstract ; as on- the Rosetta Stone it makes King into Kingdom. 
 Voc. 623 ; and Priest into Priesthood, Voc. 355. In Coptic, how- 
 ever, it precedes the word. Our word here may be JUE-e-OYpO, 
 and might be rendered Kingship; at No. 12, 27, it means an 
 Office of a lower rank. The custom of giving the royal titles to 
 the chief priest in every temple, had lowered the meaning of these 
 titles. 
 
 42 Of; as No. 3, 17. 
 
 43 Ruler or King ; see Queen, No. 4, 32. As the second letter is 
 K, we may conjecture that the first is HY ; and then with the 
 help of lyoOC, a shepherd, we get Manetho's name for the 
 Shepherd-kings, Hyk-sos. But the word HYK, for King, is not 
 found in Coptic. 
 
 44 Upper and Lower Egypt, distinguished by two flowers; the 
 lily for Upper Egypt shows several flower-leaves ; the papyrus for 
 Lower Egypt resembles a bell with a single-flower leaf. 
 
 45 With ; as No. 3, 23, where it is rendered of. 
 
 46 Children. From the joint of meat, *)p6, we get ^pO'f", 
 children, and tyHpE, a son:. This character is used in the first 
 
56 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 11. 
 
 name of this Ptolemy, and also in that of the next, for the word 
 
 Son. Voc. 1806. See also No. 15, 21, for the use of this 
 
 character. 
 
 Line 11. 
 
 1 Probably His own. N,0,0. The reed we have conjectured 
 in Voc. 658, to have the force of OU, which would make this 
 word rfOYOV, his own; as No. 33, 15. This reed, with a pair 
 of leaves, should not be mistaken for the twig with four leaves, 
 at No. 1, 12, which is an S. See also No, 26, 26, for the further 
 use of this character. ' 
 
 2 And ; as No. 1, 28. 
 
 3 Poor people, meaning, perhaps; Labourers, or Dependants; 
 F,K,A,0,0, with S,N, for the plural; c|>HKE or c|)aj KG, /)00?-. 
 The meaning is supported by the mention of Servants, in the 
 same sentence. 
 
 4 With, as No. 10, 45. 
 
 5 Servants; B,C,H, plural; fi.UJK, a servant. 
 
 6 Unto, For; the preposition as No. 15, 37. 
 
 7 Times ; R,?,0, with S,N for the plural. The meaning is very 
 well proved at No. 12, 16, and 13, 7, and at No. 18, 12, and 
 25, 28, in which last two it is preceded by the same preposition. 
 
 8 For, or unto; as No. 10, 26. 
 
 9 Ever; as No. 10, 27, and 1, 16. 
 
 10 With Good fortune; as No. 6, 13. 
 
 11 And, as No. 11, 2. 
 
 12 Probably Considering ; see No. 13, 28, where this meaning 
 is also allowable. S,N,E,B, perhaps from rfiKe to inspire. 
 
 13 The reason; R,T,E; pHTe. See No. 29, 43, where it is 
 the auxiliary verb. It must not be mistaken for Give, No. 
 9, 20, where the hand holds a pyramid. 
 
 14 Of SUCH things; M,N,E, with S,N, for the plural. Or it 
 might be taken as two words, M, the preposition Of, the other 
 letters These things, as No. 9, 4, &c. 
 
 15 Perhaps They were led, since. It seemed fit to, is what is 
 required by the Greek; A,N; perhaps from erf, to lead, to 
 
Like 11.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 57 
 
 bring. The nominative case follows the verb. Or perhaps that 
 thought may be included in the foregoing words ; and then this 
 may be the preposition Unto, as No. 32, 30. 
 
 16 The Priests; as No. 1, 24. 
 
 17 Of, or belonging to ; as No. 5, 5. 
 
 18 The country; as No. 1, 10, and 6, 21. 
 
 19 Turther; A,0,S, CH,E; Cis.^^Hl, from below ; preceded 
 by the article OY. See No. 12, 7, and 12, 31, where it has 
 nearly the same meaning, 
 
 20 To prepare; as No. 5, 11. 
 
 21 Other ; as No. 5, 36, and 3, 5. 
 
 22 -ExPENCES ; as No. 6, 1. But here we have an additional 
 Nj where it would seem we want either S,N, for the plural, or 
 nothing. See No. 11, 36, for a similar error in the artist, 
 
 23, 24, King, as No. 1, 12, and 13. 
 
 25, 26, 27, 28. Ptolemy, living for ever, beloved by Pthah, 
 as No. 1, 14, &c. 
 
 30 And; as No. 1, 28, &c. 
 
 31 Queen; as No. 4, 32; but the word here ends with T,S, 
 the feminine termination, as does the queen's name. 
 
 32 Berenice ; as No. 4, 33, 
 
 33 The GODS Euerget^ ; as No. 1, 31, and 4, 36. 
 
 34 In ; as No, 6, 3, &c. 
 
 35 An uncertain word, perhaps, indeed, a faulty drawing in the 
 Vienna copy. The first character Dr. Lepsius has, has an 
 animaPs head ; then it becomes P,T ; nexe, which, or the. 
 
 36 Temples; as No. 2, 18, &c., but here ending with S, and 
 three dots, for the plural, in the same incorrect manner as No. 
 11, 22, where we had N, and three dots. In each case we ought 
 to have S,N, and three dots. 
 
 37 And; as No. 1, 28, &c. 
 
 38 For ; H,R,N ; giperf, as No. 12, 1, and No. 23, 28. See 
 No. 7, 32, for an explanation of the first two letters. 
 
 39 The Brother gods, as No. 1, 29, and 4, 30. 
 
 40 Their buried parents; K,S,E,T, with S,N, for the plural; 
 from KHC, to bury, and ICUT, father. For the force of the S, 
 
58 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 12. 
 
 see No. 9, 16, and 34, 13. It is the first letter in the name of 
 queen Scemiophra. 
 41 Likewise; as No. 4, 31, &c. 
 
 Line 12. 
 
 1 For; as No. 11, 38. 
 
 3 The Saviour pods, or gods Soteres. The adjective is CH ; 
 X ; compare OY2tA.I, safety, of which the first syllable is only 
 the article. See No. 1, 9; 8, 31, and 13, 3, for the force of 
 this letter. 
 
 4 Laid aside ; S, Cn,E ; CKH. 
 
 6 Perhaps Those ; the pronoun belonging to. the foregoing 
 adjective. Voc. 1261. 
 
 6 The ; as No. 5, 24, &c. 
 
 7 Persons beyond; S, CH,R, with S,N, for the plural; 
 CA.^pHI, under or within. See No. 30, 35, where it more 
 clearly means former. 
 
 8 Priests ; as No. 1, 24, &c. 
 
 9 Each one; P,0 ; nOYA. The Greek has Each of the 
 temples. See No. 14, 33. 
 
 10 Egyptian; as No. 8, 31, &c. 
 
 1 1 Temples ; as No. 9, 8 ; except that there the D.S. for house 
 is repeated three times. 
 
 13 All ; as No. 8, 6, &c. ; the adjective to the foregoing sub- 
 stantive. 
 
 13 Of; as No. 5, 5, &c. 
 
 14 Cities ; as No. 5, 33, and 6, 1 1, &c. 
 
 15 Egypt ; as No. 5, 34, and 6, 13, &c. 
 
 16 Hereafter, literally. Times, as No. 11,7, &c. 
 
 17 In addition, to add, to endeavour; H,T,T; gl TOT, to 
 place the hand, a word sometimes used as a verb, and sometimes, 
 as it would seem, as an adverb, in addition. See No. 13, 15, 
 and 36, 9. As at No. 12, 39, the artist, in the choice of his 
 characters, takes one that is pictorially suitable. 
 
 18 The Priests; as No. 1, 34, and 12, 8, &c. 
 
 19 Op ; as No. 5, 5, and 13, 13, &c. 
 
 20 The gods Euerget^, as No. 1^ 31, and 11, 33, &c. 
 
Line 12.] EXPLANATION OP THE HIEBOGLYPHICS, 59 
 
 21 The, as No. 12, 6, &c. 
 
 32 Names. The ring within which a king's name is written, 
 is used for the word, and is followed by S,N, for the plural. 
 
 23 Perhaps they add. The force of the first character is doubtful. 
 But see No. 22, 17, and 36, where its meaning seems established. 
 
 24 The; as No. 12, 21. 
 
 25 Name; as No. 12, 22. 
 
 26 Of; as No. 1, 8, &c. 
 
 27 The High Office; as No. 10,41. Literally, The Kingship, 
 showing the ambitious nature of the title used by the high priests 
 of the temples. • 
 
 28 High-priestly, the adjective in the plural, following its sub- 
 stantive. The hatchet is NOU, the character under it perhaps B ; 
 making ItOYHfi., a priest. Voc. 302 and 306. Compare God, 
 No. 5, 15. The foregoing word tells us that among the various 
 words for Priest which we find used in this Decree, that written by 
 means of the hatchet, as No. 2, 19, describes those of highest rank. 
 
 29 To be Written. The character for writing is a pallette or 
 inkstand, and a reed pen ; it is followed by R, ipi, the auxiliary 
 verb of action, and by S,N, for the plural. See Scribe, No. 
 15, 13, &c. 
 
 30 The ; as No. 12, 21, and 24. 
 
 31 Further, or Additional; S, CH,R,0; CA^^pHl ; as No. 
 20, 35. See No. 11, 19, and No.. 12, 7, where the first three 
 letters are of a different form, though of the same force. 
 
 32 Office of Lord of the Builders ; NEB, 0, CH,T, followed 
 by a tool, and the stone which the tool is to cut, as the D.S., and 
 ending with the sign of abstraction, as at No. 12, 27, which makes 
 Lord into Lordship. From HHR, Lord, and eKCOT", a builder, and 
 this, from KCOT, to build. This title seems to be that which 
 Diodorus Siculus wrote Gnephachthus, as the name of an Egyptian 
 king. As we see that it was a priestly office, it reminds us of the 
 Roman priest's title of Pontifex, of which it may perhaps be the 
 original. 
 
 33 Priestly, as at No. 12, 28, the adjective following its sub- 
 stantive. See No. 2, 19. 
 
60 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LllTE 12. 
 
 34 Unto or of; as No. 1, 8, &c., but with an N of a different 
 form. 
 
 35 The Gods Euergetje; as No. 1, 31, &c. 
 
 36 The; as No. 12,24, &c. 
 
 37 Signet king ; CH, T,Mj with the D.S. of the ring. This is 
 the Hebrew word Dnn, to seal, to which is allied the Coptic 
 glTEKc, to sign. The seal is nearly the same in form as the 
 ring for a name, No. 12, 22. Again, it is not very unlike the 
 character for Life, No. 1, 16, and yet more like the character 
 for a Key. 
 
 38 To BE MADE ; A,Il,E ; ipi to make, with D.S. of the workman. 
 See No. 16, 30. 
 
 39 For. the Hands; T,T; TOT, with S,N, for the plural. In 
 choosing a letter T, the artist naturally takes one that assists his 
 spelling. The hand, when held up, with the thumb away from 
 the fingers, becomes the Hebrew letter Teth, tO, which, moreover, 
 keeps its original Coptic name. 
 
 40 Upon, the preposition placed after its plural noun ; or rather 
 Upon them, the word Them meaning the Hands, the last word ; 
 S,H,R, CAgpe, within, followed by S,N, the plural termination. 
 See No. 22, 40, where EgpA., the preposition in the same way 
 follows its substantive. See also No. 7, 32, where this class of 
 prepositions is explained. 
 
 41 Perhaps Worn ; KI ; KH placed. See No. 16, 43, and 19, 19. 
 
 Line 13. 
 1 A TRIBE, of Priests. See No. 13, 18, and 15, 31, where the 
 recurrence of the word, with the required numerals, quite proves 
 its meaning. 
 . 2 Another ; CH, T ; K6T as No. 30, 7. See No. 1, 9, and 8, 31, 
 for the force of the CH ; and No. 27, 15, for the force of the T. 
 
 3 Priests, as No. 1, 24, &c. 
 
 4 Shall be appointed. See No. 4, 17, and 8, 3. 
 
 5 In ; as No. 5, 3, &c. 
 
 6 The Temples ; as No. 2, 18, and 5, 4, &c. 
 
 7 Hereafter; as No. 12, 16. 
 
 8 In addition to, seems here required, but the second letter is of 
 
Line 13.] EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 61 
 
 uncertain force. It is perhaps an H ; and very probably the group 
 is the same as No. 15, 21, the compound preposition JU. and 
 E^ijpHI, or rather in this ease Ail and eg,6 also. See No. 16, 6. 
 
 10 The, as No. 12, 34, &c. 
 
 11 Four tribes; see No. 13, 1. 
 
 The four established orders of priests are shown on the 
 Sarcophagus of Amyrtseus in the British Museum ; see Egypt. 
 Inscript. pi. 33. The first, the Soteno, wear the crown of Upper 
 Egypt. Their name is nearly the same as No. 1, 12. The Nouto 
 wear the crown of Lower Egypt; their name is No. 1, 13. The 
 Othpho are those dedicated; their name is at No. 25, 1. The 
 Bachano are the temple servants, and No. 33, 27 is probably one 
 form of their names ; but their name on the sarcophagus quoted 
 is formed of the word No. 11, 5, servants. 
 
 12 Perhaps Of old ; CH, P ; ^UJT\ to hide, being the time lost 
 sight of, as No. 8, 20, &c. 
 
 13 On day; A,0, the article; E,0, egOOY, day; E,B, pH the 
 sun, used, perhaps, for the D.S. See No. 18, 14, where it has 
 fewer letters. 
 
 14 That ; the pronoun-adjective following the substantive ; as 
 No. 2, 15, and 3, 25. 
 
 15 To be MADE ; H,T, 0,T; gl TOT, to endeavour, literally to put 
 out the hand. See No. 12, 17. 
 
 16 Into ; the preposition, as No. 10, 42. 
 
 17 Probably Conspicuous ; as No. 37, 18, where it is so rendered 
 in the Greek. 
 
 18 Fifth tribe ; see No. 13, 1, and 16, 9. 
 
 19 For, or belonging to; the preposition, as No. 1, 8, and 
 No. 13, 16. 
 
 20 The GODS Euerget^ ; as No. 1, 31, &c. 
 
 21 Whereas; B,,N,T,E; R the preposition of No. 4, 8, and 16, 
 16; and ffTG, ffT, which. See No. 16, 45, where it has the 
 same meaning. 
 
 22 Upon, as No. 7, 32 ; or Event, as No. 8, 12. We may read 
 either, " When the event happened," or " Upon its happening." 
 See No. 7, 32 for an explanation of this word. 
 
 23 -It happened; as No. 8, 15, and 8, 37. 
 
62 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Lime 13. 
 
 24 With FORTUNE ; as No. 8, 16. 
 
 25 Good ; the adjective following the substantive. The meaning 
 of this character is very certain^ from its use on the Rosetta Stone ; 
 but its sound is less so. It is probably a B, and represents 
 OYAB., holy. Voc. 1387. See No. 14, 1. 
 
 26 And, as No. 1, 28, &c. 
 
 27 Probably good fortune. See No. 6, 13, and 11, 10, where 
 the character differs slightly from this. 
 
 28 Considering, is the meaning given to this word at No. 11, 12. 
 It should be Whereas, according to the Greek, which tells us to 
 alter the order of these last few words, thus : " Whereas it once 
 happened with good fortune." 
 
 29 The Birth ; M,S,T,0 ; from JUEC, lorn. The TO is like the 
 plural suffix TOY. See No. 35, 9, Daughters. 
 
 30, 31, King ; as No. 1, 12, and 13. 
 
 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, Ptolemv, living for ever, beloved by Pthah ; 
 as No. 1, 14—18. 
 
 37 Son ; as No. 1, 19. 
 
 38 Of ; as No. 1, 20, &c. 
 
 39 The Brother-sods ; as No. 1, 29, 
 
 40 In, the preposition ; as No. 13, 38, &c., with the usual irregu- 
 larity in its meaning. 
 
 41 Dius, the Macedonian month ; as No. 3, 13, except that here 
 it is followed, in mistake, by the D.S. of a city instead of the 
 simple ring the D.S. of time. 
 
 42 Upon ; as No. 1, 4, and 3, 31, 
 
 43 The FIFTH day ; the numeral preceded by the D.S. for time 
 without the word Bay, 
 
 44 The indefinite article OV, prefixed to the following passive 
 particle. 
 
 45 Which made ; A,Il,F, from ipe, to make. The F postfixed is 
 Cj, the prefix of an active verb, which thus becomes He made, or of 
 its equivalent, the passive It was made, as No. 7, 31. See No. 8, 
 38, and 16, 39, for the q postfixed. 
 
 46 The Day ; as No. 2, 14. 
 
 47 That ; the pronoun following its substantive; as No. 2, 1, and 
 14, 37, and with a. different form of the P, No. 2, 16, and 3, 25. 
 
Line 14.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEBOGLYPHICS, 63 
 
 48 Happiness ; ERO, T,E ; as No. 8, 21, where it is followed by 
 the feminine article. 
 
 49 OuKj P,0,N; ncurr. This pronoun supports our reading 
 FN as That; see No. 13, 47, and 2, 15, &c. 
 
 Line 14. 
 
 1 Good, the adjective following its substantive, Happiness. Of 
 these characters the last, which, when alone, as at No. 13, 25, 
 means Good, here seems like the D.S. to the preceding letters. 
 These are I,B, and may be OYA-R, holy. 
 
 2 Great, in the plural, as No. 5, 2, and 5, 37 ; another second 
 adjective following its substantive. Happiness. But we see no 
 reason for its being in the plural. 
 
 3 Unto; as No. 10, 42; 13, 16; &c. 
 
 4 The living men and women ; as No. 8, 4, and 7, 20. 
 
 5 All ; NEB, ; rtlKl, all. Compare No. 5, 23, and 7, 21, 
 
 6 There shall be enrolled T,0,T ; ^gJtOTj to place. 
 
 7 The Priests ; as No. 1, 24, &c. This, it will be observed, is 
 a general word, including the priests of several, perhaps of all, 
 ranks. 
 
 8 Probably Already. See No. 14, 20, and 16, 21, and in par- 
 ticular No. 23, 45, where the Greek requires Immediately. 
 
 9 Of the rank of Sot, or Soten, as often spelt ; S,T, with the 
 D.S. of a man wearing the crown peculiar to that order of priests. 
 See No. 1, 12. 
 
 Thus the new tribe is to be composed wholly of priests taken 
 out of the highest tribe, that of the Soteno, giving thereby to the 
 priests of that rank, as the governing body was elected by tribes, 
 a double share of the representation. 
 
 10 Temples; as No. 2, 18, &c., but preceded by the indefinite 
 article OY- 
 
 1 1 From, or since, according to the Greek ; literally, SH, A ; tyA., 
 until. But this difierence is readily explained. This is only half 
 the phrase, of which the latter half is No. 14, 21. Together they 
 are {i)A. JU.r(A.t, until this; but when separated, with a date 
 following each, the force of the two words rests on the second, 
 and we must translate them From — Until. See No. 22, 28, and 
 
64 EXPLANATION 01' THE HIEROGLYPHICS. ['Um 14. 
 
 33. This may he compared to the French Ne-pas, and Ne-point, 
 ■where, in consequence of the two words having been long used 
 together, the meaning of the first is at last transferred on to the 
 second. 'Our first character is a row of growing plants, and hence 
 its force from UjB, a twig. From this was copied the Hebrew 
 letter w. 
 
 12 That ; as No. 3, 25, &c. It usually follows its substantive ; 
 here it comes first, and is used for the article The.- 
 
 13 Yeak; as No. 1, 1, being the civil year used in dates. 
 
 14 First, in the feminine ; as sTiown by the final T. See No. 
 14, 39. No. 22, 23, is the same in the masculine. Perhaps 
 the T makes the Cardinal number into an Ordinal, as No. 1, 2. 
 
 15 Of; as No. 1, 8, &c. 
 
 16 His majesty; as No. 3, 18, and 27, &c, 
 
 17 Likewise; as No. 4, 31, &c. 
 
 18 Those, though more literally That, in the singular; as No. 
 9, 44 ; also No. 9, 42, with a difierent character for the second 
 letter. 
 
 19 Shall be enrolled ; T,0,T,0. See No. 14, 6, where this word 
 is spelt with dififerent characters; and also No. 4, 7, where the 
 D.S. gives to these characters the meaning of Religious Honours, 
 and No. 17, 32 ; and 18, 25, where it means, to be celebrated with 
 religious honours. 
 
 20 Those immediately; being the plural of No. 14, 8. See 
 No. 16, 21. 
 
 21 Until, literally, M,N,0, XXtiM, this or hitherto, preceded by 
 the article. See No. 14, 11, where the two words JiJA. JUtrtA.1 
 are explained. 
 
 22 The YEAR, being that used in dates ; as No. 1, 1. 
 
 23 Ninth ; the ordinal number, as No. 1, 2. 
 
 24 Mesore ; the last month in the Egyptian year, pictured by 
 four moons and water, meaning the fourth month of the season of 
 inundation. As the inundation began about the 18th of July, 
 this month should begin on the 16th of October. But when the 
 Calendar was adjusted, B.C. 1322, in the reign of Menophra, the 
 months were already out of place, and this month then began on 
 
Line 14.] EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLTfPHICS. 65 
 
 the 13th of June, where, at the time, it was no doubt supposed it 
 would remain. But in the course of years another change had 
 taken place ; and now, on the 9th year of Euergetes, the month 
 of Mesore began about the 17th of September. 
 
 25 Within; CH, R; e*>pHI. See No. 15, 7; 24, 16; and 
 35, 13, for this preposition. 
 
 26 Tribe ; as No. 13, 1, &c. 
 
 27 That; pronoun adjective following its substantive, as No. 13, 
 14, and 13, 47. 
 
 28 Likewise; as No. 4, 31. 
 
 29 Those bokn ; M,S,0, three dots, and S,N ; JLIEC, born, with 
 three plural terminations, the O for OY, the dots, and S,N. See 
 No. 15, 6 ; and also No. 13, 29 Birth. 
 
 30 Fob, or until ; as No. 10, 26, and 11, 8. 
 
 31 Ever; as No. 10, 27, and 11, 9. 
 
 32 The PRIESTS ; as No. 1, 24, &c. 
 
 33 Each ; as No. 12, 9, though with an of a different form. 
 
 34 It is DECREED ; as No. 4, 17, &c. 
 
 35, 36 Those who had been added.' No. 35 is N,I{., the prefix 
 rf epe of the past tense ; and No. 36 is R,T,E ; pHT, grafted on. 
 See No. 6, 30, and 17, 18 ; also No, 15, 3. _ 
 
 37 Before ; R,M,N ; for which we have in Coptic either epJLl 
 or eprt. 
 
 38 The Year, as used in dates. See No. 1, 1. 
 
 39 First; as No. 14, 14. It is in the feminine. 
 
 40 Of old ; as No. 13, 12, and 16, 41. 
 
 41 In; as No. 13, 5, &c. 
 
 42 The tribes; as No. 13, 11. 
 
 Line 15. 
 
 1 Appointed, in the plural ; the adjective to the foregoing sub- 
 stantive. See Decreed, No. 14, 34. 
 
 2 Into which ; as No. 6, 29, and 15, 36. 
 
 3 They had been added ; as No. 14, 35, and 36. Here the 
 sculptor seems to have forgotten the prefix ft ep6, and to have 
 afterwards added a small N, to supply the want. 
 
66 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LiNB 15. 
 
 4 In like manner as ; H,T,T, from gE, like. See No. 34, 38, 
 where in the Greek it is rendered A copy. 
 
 5 Before; R,,R,R,N) gipeit, be/ore. The ER are used for 
 H,R, as at No. 10, 26; and the previous R may be also a pre- 
 position, as No. 11, 6, and 15, 37, making the whole a compound 
 preposition in a manner not unusual. 
 
 6 Those born; as No. 14, 29. 
 
 7 After ; as required by the Greek. See No. 14, 25, where it 
 is translated Within. 
 
 8 Time, literally the Sun ; R,E ; pH. See No. 1, 1, &c., where 
 the sun is the D.S. for Time ; and No. 5, 22j where these two 
 letters are so used. 
 
 9 That ; the pronoun adjective to the foregoing substantive ; as 
 No. 3, 25, and 2, 15. 
 
 10 Further; R,R,A ; egpHI, the preposition; the RR for 
 HR, as at No. 10, 26, 
 
 11 Kept; H,R,H; g^peg. 
 
 12 Among; the preposition, as No. 14, 41, &c. 
 
 13 The SCRIBES. The character represents a flat ruler, which is 
 at the same time a pen-holder, and has several hollows for ink or 
 paint; and to this is joined a reed pen. See No. 18, 22 ; 
 also No. 37, 7, Letters, and No. 12, 29, Written. 
 
 14 The TRIBES ; as No. 13, 1, preceded by the indefinite article OV. 
 
 15 Which; N,T,E; ffT, as No. 9, 44, and 14, 18. 
 
 16 Of; the preposition, as No. 4, 8, &c. 
 
 17 Fathers ; T,F,E, with S,N, for the plural, as No, 4, 4. 
 
 18 Among; as No. 16, 12. 
 
 19 Those Which; P,T, with S,N, for the plural; neT, who. 
 See No. 16, 8 ; see also No. 4, 37, where the human head is a P, 
 and No. 5, 13, where we have the head of another animal for that 
 letter. 
 
 20 Made; I,R,I; Jpi, to make, as No, 17, 33. 
 
 21 Instead, according to the Greek; a compound preposition; 
 M, CHRE ; iX and e^pHI, to, in. From d;>pe, flesh, we get 
 the force of this joint of meat ; as at No. 10, 46, 
 
Like 16.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 67 
 
 22 Op; as No. 3, \7, and 10, 42, &c. 
 
 23 Priestly; ,the substantive used as an adjective. See No. 
 1, 24, &c. 
 
 24 Twenty; the numerals, as at No. 1, 7. 
 
 25 Senators, according to the Greek ; ?, CH,T,0, plural ; perhaps 
 ^^'J^yT) « chief. The first letter may be an N, in form a mallet, 
 from ItEg, to bruise, and expressed oil. 
 
 26 Chosen, according to the Greek ; M, followed by a character 
 of doubtful force, and then by an R. In the first name of 
 Bameses II. this character is translated by Hermapion, .4?!/"'''*^^/ 
 " Approved by Ra." We find it also in the name of Ptolemy 
 Euergetes, where, by the help of the Rosetta Stone we read, 
 " Approved hy Pthah." It is perhaps COTrC|, a scraping instru- 
 ment ; and thus may represent CETJT, to choose. 
 
 27 Yearly ; as No. 6, 22 ; T,R, BAI, for ETepOJUini. 
 
 28 By or to ; as No. 1, 8, and 10, 38, and 13, 19, where we have 
 very various meanings to this preposition. 
 
 29 Year ; as No. 7, 33, being the year of the seasons, while at 
 No. 15, 27, we had the civil year, as No. 1, 1. 
 
 30 Out op ; M ; XI, the preposition, as No. 5, 3, &c., where we 
 have often translated it In. 
 
 33 The FOUR tribes, as No. 13, 1. Here we learn that the 
 ecclesiastical senate gave an equal weight to each of the four 
 ranks of priests. As the higher ranks consisted of a smaller 
 number of priests, and yet had an equal number of represen- 
 tative senators, they had a large share of the power. And as 
 the five new senators were all to be priests of the highest rank, 
 that of the Soteno, these high priests gained by this Decree a 
 still greater weight in the management of the ecclesiastical matters. 
 
 33 Existing, according to the Greek ; perhaps Former ; H,R,M, 
 gipjLH, before. See No. 7, 32, and also No. 11, 38. 
 
 34 Scribes; S,A, with D.S. of a man; C^^, to write or paint. 
 
 35 Five; the numerals; as No. 1, 7, &c. 
 
 36 Who, or which; as No. 15, 2, but with a different M. 
 
 37 Prom, the preposition which we translated To, at No. 6, 24. 
 
 38 Tribe ; as No. 15, 32, &c. 
 
 f3 
 
68 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEKOGLYPHICS. [Line 15. 
 
 39 Each ; translated First at No. 14, 14. There it had a final 
 Tj the sign of the feminine. 
 
 40 Within ; as No. 12, 40. It follows its substantive as that 
 does, and would seem to make a compound preposition with 
 No. 16, 37. See No. 7, 32, for the force of the letters. 
 
 41 Priests ; as No. 14, 32, &c. 
 
 42 Twenty-five ; the numerals as No. 1, 7, and 1.5, 24. 
 
 Line 16. 
 
 1 An imperfect character or characters; perhaps P,E, 116 the 
 article The, as No. 8, 11, &c. 
 
 2 Senators, as No. 15, 25. 
 
 3 Scribes ; as No. 15, 34, but preceded by the indefinite 
 article, OY. 
 
 4 Five ; the numerals, as No. 15, 35. 
 
 5 Perhaps Divided off ; N,N,T,0 ; rf&.K may be the plural 
 prefix, and TOI to divide. 
 
 6 In addition; as No. 13,8. See also No. 22, 36, where the second 
 character, without the preposition M, clearly means Additional. 
 
 7 From ; as No. 15, 30. 
 
 8 The ; P,T ; nBT, who; as No. 15, 19. 
 
 9 Fifth tribe ; though there is no letter to make the cardinal 
 number into an ordinal. See No. 15, 32, Four tribes. 
 
 10 Belonging to ; the preposition, or the prefix of the genitive 
 case, as No. 14, 3, &c. 
 
 11 The GODS EuergetjE; as No. 1, 31, &c. 
 
 12 There shall be given ; as No. 10, 22, &c. 
 
 13 A character of doubtful meaning, being the half of an oval ring 
 for a name, followed by N, Unto. 
 
 14 Perhaps The appointed; CH,0, plural; ^CO, to appoint. 
 See No. 1, 9, where this word is used as an abridgment of ^HJUII. 
 
 15 Fifth tribe; as No. 16, 9. 
 
 16 Belonging to ; as No. 16, 10. 
 
 17 The GODS EuEKGETiE; as No. 16, 11, &c. 
 
 18 From ; as No. 15, 30, and 16, 7. 
 
 19 Those things; N,T,A, plural; jVt, rfT6. See No. 15, 15, 
 where there is a difi^erent form of the vowel. 
 
Line 16.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 69 
 
 20 All; NEB, T,N ; KlRerf, all. See No. 7, 27, and 16, 28, 
 where we in the same way have a T more than is wanted for 
 the word rt jE.1, all. 
 
 21 Hitherto ; see No. 14, 8, where it is rendered already, and 
 No. 14, 20; immediately. 
 
 22 Made; E,I; some part of the verb ipi to make. See No. 
 4, 38, where these characters are changed in their order. But as 
 the verb begins and ends with an I, either letter may come first. 
 
 23 Purifications ; as No. 2, 21 ; but here followed by the D.S. 
 of water. 
 
 24 In; as No. 9,45; but the same preposition as No. 16, 18, 
 which is rendered From. 
 
 25 The temple, literally. Divine building. See No. 5, 30, Temple, 
 and No. 2, 18, for House. 
 
 26 And ; as No. 1, 28, &c. 
 
 27 Other things; as No. 6, 25, and 3, 5. 
 
 28 All ; as No. 7, 27, &c. 
 
 29 The indefinite article, A,0 ; OY; as at No. 16, 3, &c. But 
 from No. 20, 31, this would seem to be a part of the coming 
 
 word. 
 
 30 Things done ; A,R,E, with D.S. of the agent ; and S,N, for the 
 plural. See No. 12, 38. 
 
 31 In; as No. 4, 13, and 9, 40. 
 
 32 The sanctuaries; E, with E,A, for HI house, and the plural. 
 The R is pi, a cell, or room. In the ecclesiastical writers it is 
 the name of the hermits' cells. It here may mean the inner 
 covered room in the temple, the Holy of Holies ; and our com- 
 pound word, with the article inserted between Cell, and House, 
 becomes epcl>ei, the sanctuary of the temple. See No. 28, 31. 
 
 33 Of the Country; the D.S. without the word. See No. 1, 
 
 10, &c. 
 
 34 The CHIEF ; SH, A ; ^ye, a sceptre; of which the first character 
 is a picture. The Hebrew word for a Sceptre, often meaning a 
 Tribe, should be rendered Chief in each of the following places : 
 Genesis xlix., 16; 2 Sam. v., 1 ; and 2 Sam. vii., 7. See No. 1, 
 31, for this character. 
 
70 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 16. 
 
 35 Op; as No. 1,8, &c. 
 
 36 The TRIBE ; as No. 15, 38, &c. The D.S. of the man belongs, 
 in an unusual way, not to the word it follows, but to the word 
 Chief, No. 16, 34. 
 
 37 Probably RorAL, or some title for this chief priest. The bird 
 may be either the letter A, as is more usual, or the syllable HOR, 
 for the god Horus, and OVpO, king. The diflFerence between the 
 two words is slightly shown in a careful sculpture, in the shorter 
 neck, and more hooked beak, of the Royal bird ; but if either the 
 sculpture or the drawing is rude, this distinction is lost. The 
 Royal bird is well distinguished at No. 3, 27, and 7, 29, by the 
 whip of Osiris, which accompanies it. But the whip is absent 
 from No, 6, 15, the same word. See No. 12, 27, where the office 
 of high priest is called a Kingship. 
 
 38 High Priest ; as No. 2, 19. 
 
 39 Shall be remembered; A,M,F ; EAJll, to remember, with Cj, 
 the sign of the third person singular; as No. 19, 7. 
 
 40 Like ; H ; ge, like ; meaning perhaps as when. See No. 27, 6, 
 where the H is followed by the vowel. 
 
 41 Of old, upon a time, is the rendering that we have given to 
 this word, at No. 13, 12, and U, 40, &c. 
 
 42 In; as No. 16, 18, &c. 
 
 43 Established; K,I; KH, to place. See No. 12, 41, and 
 19, 19. 
 
 44 Four tribes ; as No. 15, 33. 
 
 45 Whereas, literally, Upon this ; R, the preposition of No. 15, 
 16, &c.; and N,T,E, rfT, as No. 15, 15, and 9, 44. 
 
 46 There was ; S,K,I ; ECKH, from KH, to be, with S the prefix 
 of the feminine third person singular. 
 
 47 Ordered, or an order; T,0 ; TA.YO, to tell; as No. 22, 16. 
 
 48 To be kept ; H,B ; gUjE., to make, to work, to use. 
 
 49 An Assembly; as No. 18, 32, &c. The character may repre- 
 sent a boat with an awning over it ; as the great Egyptian gather- 
 ings of people always took place by means of the Nile. 
 
Line 17.] EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 71 
 
 Line 17. 
 
 1 TJntOj or Of ; as No. 16^ 10. 
 
 2 The GODS EuERGET^; as No. 16, 11, &c. 
 
 3 In ; as No. 8, 33. 
 
 4 The temples j as No. 2, 18, &c. 
 
 5 Perhaps, Has been celebrated. The dish, usually NEB, 
 may be rtecj the prefix of the third person singular of the im- 
 perfect tense; the T,N, may be TCUOVff, to raise up, to 
 magnify ; they are followed by the sitting figure, tbe D.S. of a 
 priest wearing ostrich feathers. 
 
 6 Month; I,?,T; 6B.OT, a month; with E,E, pH the sun as the 
 D.S. of time. The moon, lOg, is I, or E ; the force of the star is 
 doubtful. That, however, and the moon, are chosen for pictorial 
 reasons, as much as for their force as letters. 
 
 7 Every, all ; as No. 16, 28, &c. 
 
 8 On, in ; as No. 16, 31, &c. 
 
 9 Upon, THE day ; S,S,0, with the D.S. of time; CA.CA., upon, 
 as No. 1, 4. This preposition which here seems peculiar to dates, 
 seems also unnecessary after the former. 
 
 10 Fifth ; the cardinal number for the ordinal, as No. 16, 9. 
 
 11 Upon the day; as No. 17, 9. 
 
 12 Ninth; the numeral, as No. 17, 10. 
 
 13 Day twenty-pipth ; the D.S. for Day, the characters for Ten, 
 as at No. 1, 7, &c., and the star with five points for Five. 
 
 14 According to; the preposition, as No. 16, 18, &c. 
 
 15 Made ; I,R, from ipi to make. See No. 4, 38. 
 
 16 Writing, meaning Decree ; as No. 2, 16, but without the roll 
 of papyrus there added as the D.S. 
 
 17 At first, or prom the bottom; S,H',H,A; CA.^pHI. Of 
 the letters R,R, the first has the force of an H, or guttural, as in 
 No. 6, 9, and 10, 26. The latter word is spelt with the same 
 letters as this, excepting the S, witb which this begins. See also 
 No. 34, 26. 
 
 18 Was Added; as No. 14, 35, and 36. 
 
 19 And ; A,0 ; A,YtO ; as No. 2, 3 ; though these letters are more 
 often the indefinite article OY. 
 
72 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 17. 
 
 20, 21 Was celebrated. No. 20 is the prefix rfEpE as at No. 
 17, 18 ; No. 21, is I,0,T ; to which we give the same meaning at 
 No. 19, 40, and 21, 16. But perhaps No. 17, 19, which we have 
 rendered And, as it is very properly rendered near the beginning 
 of the Inscription, should here be considered as O'tT, the prefix 
 for the third person plural ; and then our three words become one, 
 and should be rendered They celebrated. We shall meet with this 
 prefix to the verb at No. 19, 9, and No. 19, 19. 
 
 22 An assembly ; as No. 16, 49. 
 
 23 Unto ; as No. 1 6, 10. 
 
 24 The gods; as No. 5, 15. 
 
 25 Great ; the adjective following its substantive, but without the 
 plural sign. See No. 5, 2, &c. 
 
 26 A FESTIVAL; so rendered in the Greek at No. 17,34. See 
 also No. 18, 37. The force of the first character is doubtful. 
 
 27 Throughout ; so rendered in the Greek. At No. 19, 14, and 
 No. 21, 10, we shall see a similar pictorial character used as the 
 D.S. for Turning about. The R,M, may be, one or other of 
 them, a preposition. 
 
 28 The country; as No. 1, 10, &c. 
 
 29 Possibly Suitable, an adjective belonging to Festival, No. 17, 
 26 ; A,0, CHEM,r ; OYAgJUieq, what corresponds, from 
 OYA.g,eiUl, to answer, to renew. See No. 5, 8, and 21, 44 ; also 
 No. 8, 9, and No. 21,51; all of which places present difficulties. 
 
 30 In; as No. 17, 1, &c. 
 
 31 A YEAR, of the seasons; as No. 15, 29; meaning with its 
 preposition. Every year. The scribe follows the Greek idiom, 
 koct' EviavTov. 
 
 32, 33 There is to be celebrated ; M,T,0,T,0 ; from TOYUJT, 
 a shrine, with M, the prefix of the infinitive mood ; and followed 
 by I,R,E, ipt to do, the auxiliary verb, which makes the sub- 
 stantive into a verb. See No. 18, 25. 
 
 34 A FESTIVAL, according to the Greek, as No. 18, 37. The first 
 character is unknown, the last is SH, as at No. 1, 31, and 29, 32, 
 and may be J4J*-'j afestiiml. 
 
 35 Perhaps Suitable ; as No. 1 7, 29. 
 
Line 17.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEEOGLYPHICS. 73 
 
 36 Conspicuous; as No. 37, 18, where it is so translated in the 
 Greek; also No. 19, 34. 
 
 37 Unto; as No. 17, 30, &c. 
 
 38, &c. King Ptolemy living for ever, beloved by Pthah, and 
 QUEEN Berenice, the gods Euerget^e ; as No. 1 1, 23—33. 
 
 Line 18. 
 
 5 Throughout; M,N ; JUft; At, in; as at No. 7, 28; or 
 N,M, rtEJm, Jt, as No. 23, 11, for the order of the letters is 
 doubtful. 
 
 6 The ; as No. 16, 8, &c. 
 
 7 Two REGIONS, of Upper and Lower Egypt. The dual form of 
 the group proves its meaning, though there seems to be no diffe- 
 rence between the two characters which should distinguish the 
 regions. See No. 3, 10. 
 
 8 Every ; T,R ; THp ; as No. 36, 24. 
 
 9 City; B,K ; K^Kl ; as No. 5, 33, and 6, 11. 
 
 10 Of Egypt; as No. 9, 12, and 12, 15. 
 
 1 1 At ; the preposition as No. 6, 24, &c. 
 
 12 The time ; as No. 1 1, 7, and 12, 16 ; here, however, the word 
 seems to end with SM, for the plural instead of SN, as is usual. 
 See 32, 3, for the same termination. Or, on the other hand, the 
 final letter may be wanting here, and the M may be a preposition. 
 
 13 Of; the preposition; as No! 16, 7, and 16, 18, &c. ; unless 
 this letter be the termination of the last word. As the words 
 were written wholly by the ear, not spelt, as with us, according to 
 known laws, and not divided one from the other, it is highly 
 probable that the writer made the end of one word in part depend 
 upon the letter that followed it. Thus our word No. 18, 12, may 
 have lost its final N, because the next letter was an M. 
 
 14 The DAY ; as No. 13, 46. See a longer form of the word 
 No. 13, 13. 
 
 15 Shining, or appearing at the star's heliacal rising after it had 
 been for some days unseen before and after its conjunction with 
 the sun. This is the word Illustrious or Epiphanes, the title of 
 the fifth Ptolemy on the Rosetta Stone ; except that there the E, 
 
74 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 18. 
 
 the first letter^ is the same as the E in the foregoing word Day ; 
 thus, with the two legs, making the word more pictorial, as Light- 
 bearing. 
 
 16 Isis, according to the Greek j being the word God; followed by 
 a pyramid for her name, and T,S, the feminine termination used 
 in the queens^ names. This name for the goddess is only used 
 in the case of her star, the Dog-star. See No. 19, 17. 
 
 17 Stak, represented pictorially. 
 
 18 Is placed; as No. 13, 16. Or this might be taken as the 
 preposition ^A.TOT, At, On, a word the same etymologically. 
 
 19 The NEW year's day ; according to the Greek. See No. 3, 16, 
 wher6 it is rendered Anniversary, and means the king's birthday. 
 
 20 Named ; being R,N, pAW, a name, followed by F, the suffix 
 for he or his, and preceded by M, a prefix of a verb. 
 
 21 The ; as No. 5, 24, &c. 
 
 22 Scribes; as No. 15, 13. 
 
 23 Op ; as No. 8, 6, &c. 
 
 24 Heavenly life. The first character is the arch of heaven, the 
 second is Life, as No. 1, 15, &c. For these latter words the 
 Greek has Sacred Scribes. 
 
 25 It is celebrated. See No. 17, 32, and 33, where this word 
 is compounded with the auxiliary ipi, to do, but without the final 
 F. With that letter it is of the same grammatical form as No. 18, 
 20, Named, beginning with M for the infinitive mood, and ending 
 with F, which makes it a participle. 
 
 26 In ; as No. 15, 12, fee. 
 
 27 The YEAR, that used in dates ; as No. 1, 1, and 14, 22, &c, 
 
 28 Ninth ; the cardinals for the numerals, as No. 16, 9, &c. 
 
 29 The month of Payni, described as the second month of the 
 season of inundation, by means of two moons, and the D.S. for 
 water, followed again by the word pH, the sun, as the D.S. for time. 
 There are no hieroglyphical words so clearly symbolical as these 
 names of the months. Other characters, while symbolical, or 
 pictorial to the eye, may very possibly have represented a sound; 
 this name for a month represents not the letters of a name, but 
 
Line 18,] EXPLANATION Ot THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 75 
 
 its scientific description. Payni, in the Egyptian movable year, at 
 this time began on the 19th of July, when the Dog-star rose. See 
 the Calendar. 
 
 30 On or "With ; the preposition, as No. 18, 11. Or this may be 
 the auxiliary verb prefixed to the next word, as No. 21, 13. 
 
 31 The HOLDING, or celebrating; as No. 17, 21, and No. 19, 33. 
 
 32 An ASSEMBLY; as No. 17, 22, &c. 
 
 33 Of; as No. 17,37, &c. 
 
 34 The NEW year's day; as No. 18, 19, &c. ; but with a slight 
 variation. Compare No. 36, 6, the pattern, or mark, put upon the 
 sacred loaves ; by which it would seem that this word is literally 
 the marked day of the year. 
 
 35 Unto; as No. 17, 37, &c. 
 
 36 Pasht, the goddess of Bubastis ; her name followed by T,S, the 
 feminine termination, as in the queens' names. She is known on 
 the monuments by having a cat's head. 
 
 37 Festival, called in the Greek the great festival ; as No. 17, 34, 
 Herodotus was present at one of these festivals in the City of 
 Bubastis, and describes it in lib. II. 60. 
 
 38 Unto; as No. 18, 35. 
 
 39 Pasht; as No. 18, 36, followed by the D.S. of a sitting figure. 
 
 40 In ; the preposition, as No. 18, 26, 
 
 41 Month; as No. 17, 6. 
 
 43 That, the pronoun adjective following its substantive; as 
 No. 13, 47, &c. 
 
 43 An unknown character, for which the Greek gives us no help. 
 
 44 Because of; as No. 16, 45, &c. 
 
 45 Which ; N,T,E ; IteT ; as No. 15, 15, &c. 
 
 46 The season; as No. 17, 29, but in a shorter form. 
 
 47 For ; as No. 18, 33, &c. 
 
 Line 19. 
 1 Religious ceremonies, as No, 4, 7. But here we have an S, 
 for which we can give no reason, except by supposing that the 
 word should have ended with SN, for the plural, and that the 
 sculptor remedied his omission by crowding in this S in a rather 
 unsuitable place. 
 
"6 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LlNB 19. 
 
 2 Because ot' ; the preposition ; as No. 18, 44. 
 
 3 The FRUIT ; T,0, plural ; perhaps OYTA.g, fruit, in which 
 the first syllable may be only the article. 
 
 4 All ; as No. 17, 1, &c. 
 
 5 The overflow; possibly gOEliU, a flood ; but the force of the 
 first character is uncertain. The wavy lines may be D.S. for 
 water, or may be in place of the final M in this word. Horapollo 
 says that the Egyptians call the Nile's inundation Noun, a word 
 represented by these three characters for N. 
 
 6 The Nile ; as No. 7, 35. 
 
 7 Is Celebrated, literally, remembered, as No. 3, 19, and 4, 6. 
 Here, as at No. 16, 39, the word ends with F, the sign of the third 
 person singular. 
 
 8 Possibly Behold, the interjection ; A,S ; IC. Compare ICXE, 
 Behold if, No. 19, 13 ; also No. 8, 13. 
 
 9 They make ; A,0, the prefix for the third person plural, OY ; 
 AjR, ipi, to make ; and F, the pronoun q of the third person 
 singular. See No. 16, 80. 
 
 10 A Decree ; as No. 4, 17, &c. 
 
 11 It happens; as No. 8, 15, &c. 
 
 12 By FORTUNE, or accident ; as No. 8, 16, &c. 
 
 13 Behold if; as No. 8, 13, and 7, 30, where it is rendered When. 
 We must here read, "If it happens by accident;" changing the 
 order of the words as at No. 22, 7. 
 
 14 The changing ; SH, B ; cycufL, to change, with the serpentine 
 line as D.S. See the first letter in No. 36, 34. 
 
 15 The festival; as No. 18, 37, &c. 
 
 16 Of; asNo. 15, 28, &c. 
 
 17 Isis, the name of the Dog-star; as No. 18, 16. 
 
 18 The STAR, represented pictorially ; as No. 18, 17. 
 
 19 Shall be placed; from K,I, Kd^, to place, as No. 12, 41. 
 More literally. They shall place, as it begins with A,0, the OY, 
 the sign of the third person plural, as at No. 19, 9. 
 
 20 A day; as No. 18, 14. 
 
 21 Further on ; T,N,N,0 ; TrtrfOOV, to send forward. 
 
Line 19.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEIIOGLYPHICS. 77 
 
 22 Because op, is required by the Greek ; but the meaning of the 
 character is uncertain. 
 
 23 The YEAa, of the seasons, as No. 7, 33, and without the D.S. of 
 the civil year, as No. 1, 1. 
 
 24 The FOURTH ; the numerals with the final T, which in Coptic 
 changes the cardinal numbers into ordinals. 
 
 25 Probably By nothing. The first letter, K, may be the pre- 
 position; the next two are the word Not in the speeches of the 
 forty-two witnesses in the Book of the Dead ; but here in the 
 forms of a noun substantive with S,N, the plural termination. 
 See Not at No. 31, 12. 
 
 26 The RELIGIOUS ceremonies ; TjO,T ; ©^OYOUT, an image ; as 
 No. 4, 7, and 19, 1. 
 
 27 The day; as No. 19, 20, &c. 
 
 28 Was made ; N,IjR ; jpi from to make, with ft E the prefix of 
 the past tense. See No. 20, 23, for the same word ; also No. 1 7, 
 33, for the verb without this prefix. 
 
 29 An assembly; being a compound word formed of No. 16, 48, 
 to keep, and No. 16, 49, an assembly. 
 
 30 That; the pronoun adjective following its substantive, as 
 No. 14, 27, &c. 
 
 31 It, the article for the pronoun ; as No. 5, 20, &c. 
 
 32 Shall be done ; S,R ; the auxiliary verb ipi to do, preceded 
 by S, the sign of the future tense. Compare No. 31, 21, which 
 is this and the next word united. 
 
 33 Celebrated; as No. 17, 21, &c. 
 
 34 Conspicuously; as No. 17, 36, and No. 37, 18. 
 
 35 Being begun ; H,T,T,r ; glTOT, to legin, followed by q the 
 sign of third person singular, and preceded by the article OY. See 
 No. 13, 15. This verb, meaning literally, to place the hand, has a 
 variety of meanings, and often does little more than add emphasis. 
 
 36 Upon; as No. 18, 40, &c. 
 
 37 The month Payni; as No. 18, 29, 
 
 38 The Day; the D.S. for time, which here seems wanted for this 
 word, rather than as part of the name of the month, as in 
 No. 18, 29. 
 
78 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 19. 
 
 39 First ; as No. 14, 39, and 15, 39, in the former of which 
 places it has a feminine termination. 
 
 40 The CELEBRATION; as No. 19, 33; but here it is more con- 
 venient to use it as a substantive. 
 
 41 Of the Assembly; as No. 18, 32, &c. 
 
 42 Was REMEMBERED, meaning, was kept ; as No. 29, 19. 
 
 43 Probably By us ; T,T,M ; GTOTert with the hieroglyphic M 
 in place of the Coptic N. The word TOT, a hand, forms part of 
 many Coptic words as here, and in gITOT No. 19, 35. See 
 No. 21, 41, where the writer also uses the first person plural. 
 
 44 The YEAR, as used in dates. See No. 1, 1, &c. 
 
 Line 20. 
 
 1 Ninth; as No. 1, 2. 
 
 2 Shall be celebrated ; as No. 19, 40, and 19, 33, and 18, 31 ; 
 in all of which the order of the letters is more clearly shown than 
 here. Here the T is understood to be below the bird, and there- 
 fore after it, in the same way that in No. 5, 15, god ; No. 10, 43, 
 H,Y,K, kinff ; No. 1, 16, H,T,N, ever ; the upper letter is under- 
 stood to be the first in the word. See, however. No. 16, 47, and 
 No. 17, 32, where this rule is not followed, but the more natural 
 one, that the character which comes first is to be read as the first. 
 
 3 An Assembly; as No. 18, 32, &c. 
 
 4 That ; as No. 3, 25, and 19, 30, Sec. 
 
 5 During; the preposition, as No. 15, 37, &c. 
 
 6 Five days ; as No. 22, 14. 
 
 7 Diadem ; the upper part of the head tied with a ribband, which 
 was the simple crown, or mark of royalty, worn by the Ptolemies, 
 as is shown on their coins. 
 
 8 Persons bringing; N,A, with S,N, for the plural ; Ui^ to bring. 
 But remark that we have here the same letters in the word Those, 
 No. 8, 8. 
 
 9 With ; M, the preposition, as No. 25, 44 ; though the owl, the 
 more ornamental form of the letter, is usually used, as No. 19, 36 ; 
 20, 11, &c. 
 
 10 Possibly Corn ; H,0, plural; gOl. 
 
 1 1 With ; as No. 20, 9 ; though with a difi'erent form of letter. 
 
Line 20.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 79 
 
 12 Sacrifices, according to the Greek ; M,S ; SJL^iH, to strike, 
 probably to stay. 
 
 13 Others ; as No. 3, 5, &c. 
 
 14 The ; as No. 18, 21, &c. 
 
 15 Altar ; S,H,E,0 ; tyHOYI followed by the D.S. This is a 
 basin standing on a pillar. The British Museum contains several 
 such basins. 
 
 16 The J as No. 20, 14, &c. 
 
 17 Perhaps Doings ; I,R,0 ; from jpi with the plural termination 
 OV. See No. 17, 33, and 15, 20, &c. 
 
 18 Perhaps Similar; T,N,T, plural ; from TrtTCJUrr, similar. ' 
 
 19 And ; as No, 16, 26, &c. 
 
 20 Other things; as No. 20, 13, &c. 
 
 21 All ; as No. 8, 5, &c. 
 
 22 Shall be celebrated ; as No. 4, 7 ; but here, as a verb with 
 S, the prefix of the future tense, as No. 33, 1. 
 
 23 Which have been made ; N,I,R, from ipi to make, with ffC 
 the prefix of the past tense. See No. 19, 28. 
 
 24 Until; R,B,A; egpHI as No. 14, 30, &c. See the next 
 word. 
 
 25 The event; H,R, gpA., the face ; as No. 8, 12. This and 
 the last word seem to make a compound word, meaning For- 
 merly. See No. 7, 32, where this word is explained. 
 
 26 Conspicuously; as No. 19, 34, &c. 
 
 27 Behold if ; A,S,K, the particle ICXe, which at No. 7, 30, 
 means When, and at No. 19, 13, If. 
 
 28 It is done ; R,T,R, some part of the auxiliaiy verb jpi to 
 make. Compare No. 6, 2, which is spelt difierently. 
 
 29 The Seasons, ibpai, according to the Greek ; but the word is 
 composed of the civil years, with a second plural termination. 
 See No. 1, 1. 
 
 30 The; as No. 20, 14, &c. 
 
 31 Doings; as No. 16, 29, and 30, with the same D.S., though 
 spelt rather differently. See also No. 12, 38. 
 
 32 In respect of, a compound preposition. The first R may be 
 
80 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LiNB 20. 
 
 the preposition, No. 18, 11, &c.; the R,R,I, egpHl upon, as 
 No. 20, 24. 
 
 33 Every thing ; CH, NEB,T. This is two words shortened into 
 one. They are written in full at No. 16, 27, and 28. More 
 nearly spelt like this is No. 26, 27. 
 
 34 Like; H,A; ge ; as No. 16, 40, and 27, 6, and 21, 46. 
 
 35 Former; 8,011,11,0, plural; CA-^jpHI, beyond ov beneath. 
 See No. 12, 7, where it means Beyond, backward into time, and 
 therefore Former ; and also No. 12, 31, where it is Additional. 
 
 36 Decree or Arrangement; as No. 4, 17; 15, 1, &c. 
 
 37 Which, or The; P,T; neTE; as No. 16, 8, and 15, 19. 
 
 38 The Heatens ; being P,T, the first the picture of the arch of 
 heaven, and also ITH, the heavens ; the second the feminine article, 
 which in Coptic is prefixed. The heavens are often represented 
 by the goddess Neith, which is in agreement with the gender of 
 the noun. 
 
 39 Shall not have ; S,M,NjT ; from JLtJUOmr, not to have, 
 with S, the prefix of the future tense, of which we have seen so 
 many examples. See No. 6, 28, Not having. 
 
 40 The; as No. 20, 16, &c. 
 
 41 Possibly Turning ABOUT ; S,M ; tfeULe. 
 
 42 Day; as No. 19, 27, &c. 
 
 Line 21. 
 
 1 That; the pronoun adjective following its substantive, as 
 No. 3, 25, &c. 
 
 2 Of; as No. 15,16, &c. 
 
 3 Probably The Wolf; meaning the Do^-ster; B,N,S; RcjUffcy. 
 That the wolf gave its Egyptian name to the Dog-star appears 
 probable from the word >iuxa0ccf, a year, a word chiefly known in 
 Alexandria, and which seems to mean the coming of the wolf. 
 
 4 Shall Happen ; as No. 19, 11, and 8, 15, &c., with S, the prefix 
 of the future tense, as No. 20, 39. 
 
 5 To come to pass, or by fortune ; as No. 8, 16, and 
 19, 12, &c. 
 
 6 At any time ; as No. 14, 40, &c., where it means. Of old; 
 here it means a future time. 
 
Like 21.] EXPLANATION or THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 81 
 
 7 By; the preposition ; as No. 21, 2, &c. 
 
 8 Decree ; as No. 4, 17 ; and 20, 36, &c. 
 
 9 The Assemblies; as No. 19, 41, &c. 
 
 10 Madk to change; the pictorial figure of turning about, 
 followed by R, for ipi the verb of action. See No. 21, 23, where 
 this figure is the D.S. of change. 
 
 11 In; as No. 19, 36, &c. 
 
 12 The country; as No. 11, 18, &c. 
 
 13 Those which are held ; I,0,T. We have this word re- 
 peatedly so translated by the Greek. The R with which it begins 
 is ipi, the auxiliary of action. See No. 19, 40. 
 
 14 In; as No. 16, 31. 
 
 15 Winter; according to the Greek. The year is divided into 
 three seasons of Inundation, Housing, and Vegetation ; and 
 therefore no two words can correspond exactly with the summer 
 and winter of the Greek. See the Egyptian Calendar. 
 
 16 Should be held; as No. 21, 13. The difference in the 
 characters, and the apparent difference in their order, does not 
 alter the word. 
 
 17 In ; as No. 21, 14, bnt with an M of a different form. 
 
 18 Summer, or the season of inundation, marked by the character 
 for water. 
 
 19 In; as No. 21, 17, &c. 
 
 20 Perhaps Season, as No. 21, 44, and No. 25, 41 ; compare 
 No. 6, 8, where the force of this character is explained. 
 
 21 Each, as at No. 15, 39 ; though more often First, as No. 19, 39, 
 or One, as No. 21, 29. 
 
 22 The ; as No. 20, 14, &c. 
 
 23 Change; as No. 19, 14. 
 
 24 The festival; as No. 19, 15. 
 
 25 Of; as No. 19, 16, &c. 
 
 26 The Star op Isis; as No. 19, 17, and 18; but here the figure 
 of the star is omitted. 
 
 27 By; as No. 21, 17, &c. 
 
 28 Day ; as No. 20, 42, &c. 
 
 29 One; as No. 21, 21, &c. 
 
 a 
 
82 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 21. 
 
 30 Because of; according to the Greek. This is a sitting figure, 
 holding the sacred whip of Osiris ; and from the first syllable in 
 his name we have A.UJ or 6ty, m;%. See No, 22, 31, where 
 we give it the same meaning. 
 
 31 The FOURTH YEAR. The final T makes the cardinal number 
 into an ordinal. This is the year of the seasons, as No. 19, 23, 
 and 24. 
 
 32 As DECREED. The R may be the verb of action ipi. See 
 Decree, No. 20, 36, &c. j and No. 31, 14, where the same 
 auxiliary verb of action is employed. 
 
 33 Other; K,T, CH,T, plural; KET, X^^- ^^ch of these 
 words means Other; they are here joined, making a reduplicate 
 word, in a form common in the Coptic language. The wish of 
 the sculptor to make his inscription ornamental is here shovro by 
 his using the pyramid as one of the letters in this very unim- 
 portant word. 
 
 34 Assemblies; as No. 21, 9, &c. 
 
 35 Behold. So we have ventured to render this at No. 19, 8, &c. 
 
 36 Those which are held, as No. 21, 16. But here we have 
 not got the verb of action. 
 
 37 Belonging to; as No. 1, 8. But remark that No. 21, 14, 
 the preposition holding the same place in a similar sentence, is an 
 M, not an N. But the Coptic language is equally irregular in 
 the use of its prepositions. 
 
 38 Summer; as No. 21, 18. 
 
 39 Throughout; E,M, the preposition JUL, as No. 21, 19. For 
 the force of the vowel, see No. 4, 35 ; and 34, 18. 
 
 40 Egypt. See Voc. 790 and 792. The first character, when 
 drawn more carefully, is a crocodile's tail ; and thus the word 
 Champsi, Herodotus's name for the crocodile, represents the word 
 XHAAI, Egypt. 
 
 41 We shall hold ; the word lOT, to which we have so often given 
 this meaning, preceded by T,N, the Coptic prefix Terf for the 
 first person plural of a verb. Remark that though the Greek does 
 not make the writer speak in the first person, yet the hieroglyphics 
 do, not only here, but at No. 19, 43. 
 
Line 21.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 83 
 
 42 In; as No. 21, 37, &c. 
 
 43 Winter; as No. 21, 15, but here in the plural. 
 
 44 In the Seasons, according to the Greek ; A,0, KEM, plural, 
 possibly OVA-gEJU, a renewal. See No. 5, 8, where we gave the 
 force of CHEM to the peculiar character in this word ; and 
 also No. 17, 29, and 35, where we rendered this word &s Suitable; 
 also No. 25, 41, Season. 
 
 45 Coming ; A, or rather I, with S,N, for the plural ; from I, to 
 come. See No. 3, 9. This letter with two legs is chosen in order 
 to distinguish it as a verb relating to motion. 
 
 46 Like ; as No. 20, 34. 
 
 47 What happened; as No. 19, 11, &c. 
 
 48 To COME TO pass; as No. 19, 12, &c. Here the Greek is 
 very exactly translated by these two words. 
 
 49 Op old; or once upon a time; as No. 21, 6. 
 
 50 In; as No. 21, 14, &c. 
 
 51 Here the Greek does not help to determine whether this word 
 relates to time or place. Possibly it may mean the Provinces of 
 Egypt. See No. 5, 8, and 21, 44, where the two meanings both 
 appear. 
 
 Line 22. 
 
 1 Chiep; A,P,A, plural; A.ne ; as No. 8, 25. This helps to 
 determine the meaning of the former word. 
 
 2 Because of this; as No. 16, 45, &c. 
 
 3 Event ; as No. 8, 12, and 20, 35. See No, 7, 32, for an 
 explanation of the difficulty in regard to this word. 
 
 4 If; as No. 20,27; 19, 13, &c. 
 
 5 Is MADE; from the auxiliary verb, as No. 12, 38. 
 
 6 Behold; as No. 21, 35, &c. 
 
 7 Decree or Arrangement ; as No. 20, 36 ; but made into 
 a verb by the help of the auxiliary verb, No. 22, 5, from which it 
 is separated by the interjection. We must translate, " If the year 
 shall be arranged." 
 
 8 The YEAR, that of the seasons ; the Greek has aiauTo; ; but the 
 "Greek and hieroglyphics do not always agree in the use of the 
 word. 
 
 g2 
 
84 EXPLANATION Or THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Like 22. 
 
 9 The J as No. 20, 14, &c. 
 
 10 Day ; as No. 20, 42, &c. 
 
 11 Three hundred; according to the Greek. 
 
 12 Sixty. See No. 15, 24, for these numerals. 
 
 13 And; as No. 18, 1, &c. 
 
 14 Five days; as No. 20, 6. 
 
 15 Noted, or peculiar, is the meaning that we must give to this 
 word, which at No. 36, 6, is the Pattern marked on the holy cakes 
 belonging to the priests. These are the days called by the 
 Greeks the Epagomense. See the Calendar. 
 
 16 Ordered; as No. 16, 47, and 35, 25. 
 
 17 Additional ; see No. 22, 36. 
 
 18 To BE added ; as No. 6, 30. M is the prefix of the infinitive 
 mood. The first letter, the hind quarters of a lion, seems to be of 
 the same force as the fore quarters. Compare this word and No. 
 22, 37, each following the same word. See No. 14, 36, for this 
 verb. 
 
 19 The prefix of the infinitive mood to the next verb. See No. 
 29, 24. 
 
 20 To celebrate; as No. 17, 32. 
 
 21 The additional; as No. 22, 17, and 36. 
 
 22 Day; as No. 22, 10. 
 
 23 One, ov first ; as No. 2\, 21, &c. 
 
 24 Of; as No. 21, 19, &c. 
 
 25 The Assembly, or festival; as No. 21, 34, &c. 
 
 26 Unto; as No. 18, 33, &c. 
 
 27 The GODS EubrgetjE ; as No. 18, 4, &c. 
 
 28 Away from ; SH, A, N, literally, tyA-K until; but it is placed, 
 as we should consider, too early in the sentence, and we must 
 make use of it later. See No. 14, 11, and 21, where this pecu- 
 liarity is explained. 
 
 29 Day ; as No. 20, 42. 
 
 30 That, as No. 21, 1. 
 
 31 Because of; as No. 21, 30. 
 
 32 TherouRTH year; as No. 21, 31. 
 
 33 Until ; being the prefix of the case to the coming substantive, 
 to mark it out as the word governed by the preposition Until, 
 
Like 22.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 85 
 
 No. 22, 28. Or this letter may be described as the latter half of 
 No. 22, 28, here repeated. 
 
 34 The ADDED ; as No. 22, 17, but without the plural sign. 
 
 35 Five days ; as No. 22, 1 4. 
 
 36 Additional ; as No. 22, 34, &c. This word may be taken as 
 the well-known Greek name for those days, the Epagomenm. 
 which made the year of twelve months and five days. These days 
 were added to the Egyptian year at least as early as the year 
 B.C. 1322. 
 
 37 Which were added; as No. 22, 18, &c. 
 
 39 The NEW yeak's day; as No. 3, 16, and 22, 15. 
 
 40 Upon ; the preposition following its noun, as No. 12, 40. See 
 No. 7, 32. 
 
 41 So that IT MAY BE made; F,ll,E; the auxiliary verb ipi, pre- 
 ceded by C| the sign of the third person singular. This F, in 
 Coptic, is a prefix ; but in the hieroglyphics it is more usually a 
 suffix, as at No. 7, 31. 
 
 42 Known, according to the Greek; CH, N,B. The word XlffOV, 
 to know, with B instead of F for the sign of the third person 
 singular. 
 
 43 Men and women; as No. 10, 34. 
 
 44 All; as No. 17, 7, &c. 
 
 ■ 45 About; as No. 15, 16, &c. 
 
 46 This; as No, 14, 18. These two words may be compared also 
 to No. 16, 45. 
 
 47 Former ; N,E,T,0 ; from gA-TH, to precede, with N the prefix 
 of the past tense, as at No. 20, 23. 
 
 48 Defect ; TH, R, ? ; perhaps XOpg a defect, the TH having the 
 guttural force, as is not unusual. 
 
 49 Of the arrangement; literally, appointed writing; from, 
 ■VOCO to appoint, and the character for Scribe or Writing. See 
 No. 9, 10, for the force of the first letter, and No. 32, 16, for the 
 word Writing. 
 
 50 In respect of ; N,T,R ; itTEpE, as, when. 
 
 Line 23. 
 
 1 The civil years; as No. 1, 1, &c. ; those of the reign used 
 in dates. 
 
86 EXPLANATION OV THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 23. 
 
 2 And ; as No. 18, 1, &c. 
 
 3 The NATURAL YEAR J as No. 19, 23, &c. 
 
 4 And j as No. 18, 1, &c. 
 
 5 The COMMANDS ; T ; TA.YO, to tell, explained by the D.S. of 
 a man pointing to his mouth. See No. 22, 16. 
 
 6 Which ; as No. 22, 46, &c. 
 
 7 Of, or relating to ; as No. 1, 8, &c. 
 
 8 Perhaps the Judgments; E,P,0, plural; perhaps gEn, a 
 judgment ; but this is not very satisfactory. 
 
 9 Op, or relating to ; as No. 23, 7, &c. 
 
 10 The amendment; L, CH,0, plural; tsiSiHSiX to heal. The 
 hieroglyphics make no distinction between an L and an R. 
 
 11 Of; N,E,M; rfeiU ; as No. 2, 10. 
 
 1 2 The faults ; T,N,B, plural ; perhaps from rt oRe a fault, 
 with T, for the article prefixed in an unusual- way. This is not 
 wholly satisfactory, as in Coptic our word is masculine, and T is 
 the feminine article. See No. 8, 2, for the letter B. 
 
 13 The ; as No. 20, 37. 
 
 14 Heavens ; as No. 20, 38. 
 
 15 Which HAPPENED ; as No. 21, 47. 
 
 16 To COME TO PASS ; as No. 21, 48. 
 
 17 Behold ; as No. 21, 35, and 19, 8. 
 
 18 The PRODUCTION or command; as No. 22, 16, though with 
 different characters. See No. 5, 35, for the T, or rather TAU, 
 and No. 2, 10, for the vowel E, making together TA-YE, to beget. 
 
 19 The adornments. From THBL, a finger, we get TARteBl 
 adorned. 
 
 20 Solely, or singly, as No. 9, 28. 
 
 21 The excellence ; H,0; gOVO. 
 
 22 Of THE ; as No. 20, 14, &c. 
 
 23 The gods Euerget^ ; as No. 22, 27, &c. 
 
 24 Whereas, or literally. This, as No. 22, 2, and No. 16, 45, 
 where we have Whereas written at full, as Upon this. 
 
 25 When ; S,K, it would seem, instead of ASK, No. 7, 30, &c. 
 
 26 A daughter ; as No. 2, 5. 
 
 28 Unto; H,R,N; gipElt, as No. 11, 38. See No. 7, 32. 
 
Line 23.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROBLYPHICS. 87 
 
 29 — 36 King Ptolemy living for evee, beloved by Pthah, 
 AND ; as No. 1 1, 23—30. 
 
 37 Queen ; NEB, TO ; nH&., -00 ; Lord of the world, since there 
 is no sign of the feminine. To the dish we gave the force of NEB 
 at No. 5, 9 ; and to the latter characters the force of TO at 
 No. 1, 10. This title NEB, seems to be allied to Nebo, the 
 name of the Babylonian god. 
 
 38 Berenice; as No. 11, 33, &c. 
 
 39 The GODS EuBEGETiE; as No. 11, 33, &c. 
 
 40 The sitting figures of the king and queen, as the D.S. 
 
 41 Unto them; H,T,T,0 ; ^iCTOiTOf unto them. Compare 
 No. 12, 17, and No. 18, 18 ; where we have the preposition 
 
 without the final vowels, which are the personal pronoun. As the 
 preposition is compounded of TOT a hand, the artist chooses a 
 hand for his letter T, rather than any other form of that letter. 
 
 42 Berenice ; as No. 23, 38. The young princess had the same 
 name as her mother. 
 
 43 The ; as No. 12, 30, &e. 
 
 44 Name her. See No. 12, 25, for the word Name. The final 
 S is the feminine pronoun suffix for Her. 
 
 45 Immediately, as is required by the Greek. See No. 14, 8, 
 and 14, 20, and 16, 21, in all of which places it bears a similar 
 meaning. 
 
 46 Proclaimed; 0,S; JUlty, to proclaim. 
 
 47 A queen. See No. 4, 32. But here we have not got the K 
 of the word Hyk ; and we have the indefinite article prefixed. 
 
 Line 24. 
 
 1 D.S. of the queen, as at No. 4, 32. 
 
 2 By, preposition, as No. 22, 45, &c. 
 
 3 Fortune or accident ; as No. 23, 16, and 13, 24, &c. 
 
 4 Behold, as No. 19, 8, and 23, 17, &c. 
 
 5 The GODDESS. See the word God, No. 6, 15. It has here, 
 instead of the masculine termination, that for the feminine, as in 
 the queens' names. 
 
 6 The SAME ; T,N ; allied to TAfi A.I, in like manner, and 
 TertTtJUrf, to imitate, see Voc. 1286. Compare No. 20, 18. 
 
 7 Little ; A,0,S,M ; WJHJU, little, preceded by the article, 
 
88 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LiHE 21. 
 
 which, according to custom, in Coptic, is joined to the adjective, 
 or substantive, whichever stands first. 
 
 8 Woman ; R,N,N ; pEJLt, a man, or woman, followed by T,S, 
 the feminine termination of the queens^ names, and by the D.S. 
 In comparing the hieroglyphics with the Coptic, the change from 
 N to M is not unusual. See No. 19, 43. 
 
 9 Taken away ; S, K,S ; CEK, with a final S, which may be to 
 make the adjective feminine. See No. 25, 31. 
 
 10 Unto, preposition; as No. 15, 37, &c. 
 
 11 Heaven; P,Tj nH, Aeai^ere, followed by the feminine article. 
 See No. 23, 14. 
 
 12 Whilst ; M,S, CH, CH,T; a word which we may very satis- 
 factorily support by comparing it to CA-^HT, lower, and 
 CA-^OYIt, within; having an M for the prefix. 
 
 13 The PKiESTs ; as No. 1, 24, &c. 
 
 14 Who had come ; as No. 3, 9, where in the same way a character 
 with legs was chosen as figurative of motion, and to distinguish 
 this word from others of the same letters. 
 
 15 From the country ; as No. 1, 10, &c. 
 
 16 Near; CH,R; e*)pHI, w«7to. See No. 35, 13. 
 
 17 The king; as No, 1, 12, and 13, &c. 
 
 18 His presence; N,R,0, plural; tUpuJOX, the mouths. The 
 Mouth, in Coptic is used for He himself. 
 
 19 Yearly, literally, year ; as No. 22, 8. 
 
 20 Remaining, according to the Greek, M,E,B,T, with D.S. of a 
 house. M may be a prefix, and GIeB-T is to rise ; but this will 
 hardly help to support our rendering. 
 
 21 In the presence, as No. 24, 18, but rathered shortened in the 
 number of letters, as is not unusual when a word is used a second 
 time in the sentence. See No. 6, 30, where these same letters 
 are the prefix of the imperfect tense. 
 
 22 Of his Majesty ; as No. 3, 18, &c. 
 
 23 Celebrating, is the meaning here required, though at 
 No. 1 2, 5, we considered this word a pronoun. The first letter, 
 EI, may represent A.J A.I, to magnify, or it may be made to stand 
 for the word lOT, of No. 18, 31, &c. See No. 29, 13, where 
 we must give the same meaning to the single letter. 
 
Line 24.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 89 
 
 24 The ; using the heavens for a P, from ITH, the heavens. This 
 is as remarkable a use of a character as what we saw at No. 21, 30, 
 where the figure of Osiris was used for Because of. - 
 
 25 Gkeat; according to the Greek ; R, CII,T; which drives us to 
 the rather unreasonable conjecture that the sculptor has reversed 
 the order of the letters, and that they are meant for 2C(X)pi, great, 
 with T the feminine article, as No. 4, 2. We made the same bold 
 conjecture at No. 8, 26 ; and at No. 2, 7, it was certainly the case 
 in the name of Philammon. 
 
 26 Lamentation, literally, Cuttivg ; SH, T ; tyET, to cut. The 
 custom of gashing the flesh in grief was common in Egypt, aud 
 deprives this rendering of any improbability. It is described 
 by Herodotus in lib. II., 61. For the force of our first letter see 
 No. 1,31; 5, 16; and 16, 34. 
 
 37 The ; as No. 20, 14, &c. 
 
 28 Praises; A,E; from A.IA.I, to praise, &% No. 7, 1. Compare 
 No. 24, 23. 
 
 29 He, but meaning They ; as No. 4, 37. 
 
 30 Perhaps Finding; H; g,e to find. The Greek has " Think- 
 ing it right.'^ Perhaps we must understand our word as Con- 
 sidering. This character is common as ^C, like ; see No. 16, 
 40, &c.. 
 
 31 About, or Upon; as No. 13, 33, &c. See No. 7, 32, for an 
 explanation of this word. 
 
 32 Particulars ; at No. 9, 38, and 23, 20, this is rendered 
 Single things. 
 
 33 He, meaning They ; as No. 24, 29, &c. 
 
 34 Asked; ?,H,0, with D.S. of a man holding up his hands in 
 the act of prayer; probably, 'TgO, to ask. The lessusual Coptic 
 letter is naturally represented by an unusual character. 
 
 35 From ; as No. 4, 3. See also No. 3, 10, for this compound 
 character. 
 
 36 The RING, here described by only one of his two titles. See 
 No. 1, 13, and 13. The figure placed as D.S. holds in his hand 
 the whip carried by Osiris, as if it were in his character as a god 
 that he undertook to declare his infant daughter a goddess, 
 
 37 And ; as No. 23, 36, &c. 
 
90 EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 24. 
 
 38 Queen ; as No. 4, 52, and with the same D.S. 
 
 39 The ; as No. 23, 43, &c. 
 
 40 Gifts ; as No. 5, 35, But here either the termination is 
 incomplete, or it is in a less usual form. See, however, Voc. 
 401 for the same. It is probable that, as the whole sentence is 
 written by the help of the ear, without any attempt to spell 
 grammatically, the N of the plural termination is dropt, because 
 the following word begins with an M. For other cases of the 
 same kind, see No. 7, 5 ; 18, 12; and 32, 4, in all of which it is 
 doubtful whether the M holds the place of a final N, or of a 
 preposition following the word in which the N has been dropt. 
 
 41 From; as No. 21, 27, &c. 
 
 42 Them; as No. 9, 4. 
 
 43 To grant ; the word Give preceded by R,R, which may be 
 egpHI the preposition, as we interpret the double R, at No. 10, 
 26 ; and 20, 24 ; and may thus form part of the verb. 
 
 Line 25. 
 
 1 To consecrate; 0,T,P; OYOTeR. See Voc. 438. This word 
 forms the end of many Egyptian names, such as Amunothph, 
 dedicated to Amun ; and Mandothph, dedicated to Mandoo. 
 
 2 A GODDESS ; as No. 24, 6. 
 
 3 The SAME ; T,N ; TertTCJUrf, to imitate ; as No. 24, 6. 
 
 4 Like ; ge like ; though more often used in this inscription as 
 A.gA, and. 
 
 5 Osiris. The Egyptian sculptors take some liberties, for pic- 
 torial reasons, when writing this word. The hatchet is God. The 
 throne is ISI, as in the name of the goddess Isis. The eye is 
 used for R, instead of the mouth, and in this word only. In every 
 other word the eye is a vowel, as in the name Arsinoe, and at 
 No. 12, 5 ; and 14, 1, and 16, 20, and 16, 22, and 17, 33, &c. But 
 in order, probably, to represent the eye of providence, the sculptor 
 here uses it instead of the mouth. It forms the word of action 
 ipi, while the ISI is CXJcy, to declare. Hence the name Osiris, 
 a Judgment-maker, or Judge, a that of the Cabeiri gods means 
 Punishment-makers, from kRa., to punish. 
 
 6 In; as No. 18, 40 &c. 
 
LiKB 25.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 91 
 
 7 Temple ; as No. 4, 9. 
 
 8 Of ; as No. 1, 8, &c. 
 
 9 Canopus, according to the Greek ; P,K,0,T, followed by the 
 feminine article, and D.S. of a city. But this reading of the 
 letters is given in the belief that the second letter should have 
 been like the K in No. 6, 3 ; whereas it too much resembles the 
 N in No. 6, 30. See No. i, 14. 
 
 10 Which ; as No. 22, 3. 
 
 1 1 Among ; a compound preposition, formed of M, SiX, in, and 
 N,E,N ; ffgOYIt, within. See No. 25, 34. 
 
 12 The TEMPLES ; as No. 5, 4, &c. 
 
 13 Peincipal, according to the Greek; literally. Royal ; as No. 
 26, 15, and No. 37, 24, where its meaning is very certainly proved. 
 But see also No. 8, 2 1 and No. 1 3, 48, where it of necessity bears 
 a very different meaning. Having the original force of epcUTe , 
 milk, it here means OVpO, royal, and there epOVOT, happiness. 
 
 14 For which, two words, as No. 16, 45, &c. 
 
 15 Expense; S,0 ; 66, as No. 25, 18. 
 
 16 Great ; as No. 4, 2 ; 5, 2 ; &c. 
 
 17 Of the Egyptians. See No. 8, 31, &c. where this word is 
 spelt with fewer letters. This is perhaps the adjective, not Copts, 
 but Coptic, in the plural. 
 
 18 Expense ; as No. 25, 15. 
 
 19 For them; M,T,T; of which M is the preposition, and TT 
 is TOT the hand. In Coptic it is written with an N, rfTOTOV, 
 literally. For their hand; but the pronoun at the end of the word 
 is omitted, as we must suppose, in carelessness. 
 
 20 Was Prepared, as No. 5, 11, and 30, 38. 
 
 21 By; as No. 25, 8, with a different meaning. But the Coptic 
 use of the prepositions is very irregular. 
 
 22 The King ; as No. 24, 36. 
 
 23 And ; as No. 4, 31, &c., where it is rendered Likewise. 
 
 24 The living men and women ; as No. 7, 20, &c. 
 
 25 Op; as No. 11, 17, &c. 
 
 26 The Country; as 24, 15, &c. 
 
92 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 25. 
 
 27 In or during ; as No. 21, 7, &c. 
 
 28 The TIMES ; as No. 11, 7, &c. 
 
 29 The auxiliary verb ; A,R; tpi ; as No. 22, 5. It is part of 
 the coming verb. 
 
 30 Behold, as No. 22, 6, &c. 
 
 31 Shall draw; S,K; CEK, as at No. 24, 9. It is separated 
 from its auxiliary verb, No. 25, 29, by the word Behold. Without 
 the auxiliary verb it might be a substantive. 
 
 32 Perhaps Our; T,0,N; -euurfj our. It is the adjective to the 
 foregoing word, which thus becomes, " We shall draw." 
 
 33 Osiris; as No. 25, 5. 
 
 34 During or among ; as No. 25, 11. 
 
 35 The DRAWING along; S,K ; ceK, as No. 25, 31. The final 
 TT may be TOT, a hand, a word so often used as a preposition, 
 and here it may correspond to our Along. 
 
 36 The BARGE, represented pictorially. The procession of men 
 drawing along the statues of the gods in a barge on the Nile, 
 may be seen on the sarcophagus, Egypt. Inscrip. pi. 28. 
 
 37 To, a preposition ; as No. 25, 27, Sec 
 
 38 The TEMPLE; as No. 25, 7. 
 
 39 Same ; as No. 24, 6 ; being an adjective to the word which it 
 follows. 
 
 40 At or on ; as No. 25, 27, &c. 
 
 41 The season, as No. 21, 20, &c. 
 
 42 Of ; as No. 23, 7, &c. 
 
 43 The year; as No. 1, 1, &c. 
 
 44 From; as No. 20, 9. 
 
 45 The temple; as No. 25, 38; but without the D.S. which 
 follows it, and seems very unnecessary to a character which is 
 itself pictorial. 
 
 46 Which ; as No. 23, 6, though with different characters. The 
 T being below the N is considered as following it. 
 
 47 Heracleium, according to the Greek. The town of Hera- 
 cleopolis, near which this temple was situated, was in the middle 
 of Egypt, and was near the town, or perhaps was the same town 
 as that which was fortified by the Ptolemies, and called Ptolemais. 
 
Line 25.] EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 93 
 
 It was within a few miles of Oxyrynchus, where the fish was 
 worshipped; and this helps to explain the hieroglyphical name 
 where we see a fish among the characters. The first three letters 
 are A^N^E,, or more probably A, CHjR, as these two characters are 
 easily mistaken ; 2CCXjpi, great, the Egyptian name for Hercules. 
 The next letter, B, may represent such a word as ABO, city ; as 
 we judge from the names of many Egyptian cities. Thus Bu- 
 bastis is the city of Pasht ; Bu-siris is the city of Osiris. The 
 two other letters, M,U, may be the name of the sacred fish. Or 
 the M may be the prefix of the case, and R alone the word Fish, 
 
 Line 26. 
 
 1 On or in ; as No. 25, 6. 
 
 2 The month of Choiac, the fourth in the Egyptian civil year; and 
 therefore, when the Calendar was arranged, B.C. 1322, and when it 
 again became right in a.d. 138, it began on our 16th of October. 
 At this time, however, when Payni, the tenth month, began on the 
 19th of July, Choiac of the civil year began on the 20th of 
 January. See the Calendar. 
 
 3 Twenty-nine ; the numerals, as No. 15, 42. This day, the day 
 of the ceremony of the water procession on the Nile, was probably 
 the time of the priests^ assembling at Canopus ; and the Decree 
 probably means by this month, not the Choiac of the civil year, 
 but of the reformed calendar which the priests are now proposing 
 to introduce. The 29th of Choiac was eighteen days before the 
 17th of Tybi, when the Decree was issued. 
 
 4 The Egyptians; as No. 8, 31, but preceded by the article. 
 Instead of this, the Greek has The priests of the course. 
 
 5 Of the temples; as No. 25, 12, &c. 
 
 6 Principal; as No. 25, 13, and No. 26, 15, where the Greek 
 supports this meaning. 
 
 7 At ; as No. 25, 27, &c. 
 
 8 The times ; as No. 25, 28, &c. It ends with plural letters, 
 S,N. 
 
 9 The ; as No. 23, 43, &c. ; or perhaps They, as No. 24, 29, if 
 the following word is a verb. 
 
 10 Complete the sacrifices ; E,I,K, for A.IK, a dedication; and 
 
94 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LlSE 26. 
 
 R,R, the auxiliary verb of action, ipi ; and followed by a burning 
 censer, the D.S. See No. 32, 43. 
 
 11 The; as No. 24, 39, &c. 
 
 12 Altars; SH, E,0 ; JiJHOVI, followed by the D.S. See 
 No. 20, 15. 
 
 13 Of; as No. 25,25, &c. 
 
 14 The Temples ; as No. 25, 12, &c. 
 
 15 Principal, so rendered in the Greek. See No. 25, 13, and 
 37, 24. 
 
 16 The; as No. 26, 11, &c. 
 
 17 One half of the coorse, according to the Greek. This is 
 probably some standard carried in the procession of the priests ; 
 at the top is an ostrich feather. 
 
 18 The other half of the course ; perhaps a similar standard. 
 
 19 Of; as No. 26, 1, &c. 
 
 20 Perhaps Family ; in the Greek, course. But whether is thereby 
 meant the procession or the tribe of priests is doubtful. The 
 letters are GH, F,T. The T may be the feminine article. The 
 word 2CHCJ, like the Hebrew ^NJ, means at once the Avenger, 
 Redeemer, and Next of Kin ; and as the priesthood in Egypt was 
 hereditary, it may well be rendered Family. See No. 34', 61. 
 Compare also No. 8, 17. 
 
 21 The meaning Those ; as No. 26, 9, &c. 
 
 22 Op; as No 22,33, &e. 
 
 23 Temple ; as No. 25, 7, &c. 
 
 24 That same ; as No. 24, 6, &c. 
 
 25 Mingling or joining; M,0, CH,T; JU10Y25:T, jn«a7e<?. The 
 Greek, /jLinca h ravra, which should mean After this, may have 
 been understood by the Egyptian scribe to mean Jointly with this. 
 
 26 In this not uncommon word Dr. Reinisch's copy has the twigs, 
 with four leaves on each ; but I correct it with confidence, and 
 adopt Dr. Lepsius's reading. The twig with four leaves is S, from 
 (Je a plant, as at No. 1, 12, &c. The twig with two leaves is 0, 
 perhaps from OKEj AKEj A.5(|l, a reed, as at No. 11, 1, and 
 No. 33, 15. This word 0,0, N,N, I read in other inscriptions as 
 OYtOim shining ; see Voc. 658; but here it may mean Harps, 
 as that Coptic word has this second meaning also. 
 
LiSE 26.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 95 
 
 27 All the other; see No. 16^ 27, &c., Other; and No. 16, 
 
 28, &c., All. 
 
 28 Religious ceremonies ; as No. 20, 22, and 22, 20, &c. 
 
 29 For ; as No. 25, 42. 
 
 30 The Celebrations ; as No. 19, 33, but with the omission of a 
 vowel, and the addition of the plural sign. It is not unusual, 
 when a word is often repeated, to find fewer letters in the later 
 examples. 
 
 31 Dedication ; as No. 26, 10, but written with fewer letters, as 
 explained above. 
 
 32 Her raising up ; EI, N,S ; from IW I to raise, with S, the 
 feminine pronoun. 
 
 33 The GODDESS ; or literally, God, as we have no feminine termi- 
 nation. The D.S. is of a woman, as No. 24, 8, &c. 
 
 34 Probably Made for her ; T,R,S ; the TR means Tpo, to make, 
 and the S, the feminine termination, may he for her. This is not 
 wholly satisfactory, but it seems confirmed at No. 28, 48, and 
 
 29, 15. But see No. 36, 24, where TR is translated All. 
 
 35 Probably Libation, or pubification ; the character which we 
 have so often rendered Priest. This character, when it means a 
 Libation, should be followed by the D.S. of water. See Voc. 347, 
 353, and 361. 
 
 36 To heal; S,N; CHmi; as No. 39, 17. 
 
 37 The GRIEF FOR HER ; in Coptic JUlKA.g. This may be explained 
 if we suppose the locks of hair to be KA.gl, the head. The final 
 S may be the feminine pronoun, to make it Grief for her, as 
 No. 29, 18. But see No. 22, 48, where the lock of hair seems to 
 be an H. 
 
 38 Her raising up ; as No. 26, 32. 
 
 Line 27, 
 
 1 They prepared ; as No. 5, 1 1 ; though here we have an R 
 more than in the former place. It may perhaps be the preposition, 
 possibly For. 
 
 2 They, or them ; as No. 9, 4. 
 
 3 With ; as No. 26, 19, &c. 
 
 4 Perseverance ; S,R,F ; Cepqe, to persevere. 
 
96 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [IjI™ 27. 
 
 5 Possibly Care, as such a meaning is here required. It may be 
 a flame of fire, as at No. 26, 10; and the word Ji)A.g, is both 
 Flame and Care. 
 
 6 Like; as No. 16, 40. But see No. 24, 30, where we find this 
 letter with a different meaning. 
 
 7 The CEREMONIES, or preparation, or some such meaning, is 
 here needed ; but the Greek does not help us. 
 
 8 The ; as No. 23, 43, &c. Here the scribe follows the Greek so 
 closely that he puts the article before Apis, and not before Mnevis. 
 
 9 Apis the bull ; as No. 5, 26. 
 
 10 Mnevis the Bull ; as No. 5, 27. 
 
 11 Celebrated; as No. 24, 23. 
 
 12 It was determined, S,M,M,M ; CiLtJUe, to declare. 
 
 13 There was given ; N,R,T,T ; the word to Give, as No. 5, 35, 
 preceded by NRT, a prefix for the imperfect tense, which we may 
 support by the Coptic, rfEpCTErf, of the second person plural. 
 
 14 By or upon ; as No. 13, 22, and 24, 31, &c. 
 
 15 Command; T, with D.S. of a man speaking; perhaps TA-YO, 
 as No. 23, 5. 
 
 16 Honours. See No. 6, 13, where we supposed that Colossal 
 Statues were the honours meant. The final TN is in place of the 
 more usual SN. 
 
 17 Immortal; as No. 1, 16, &c. The adjective follows its sub- 
 stantive. 
 
 18 Unto ; as No. 26, 22, &c. 
 
 19 The queen ; as No. 4, 32 ; but having also the final S, the 
 feminine termination. This title, given to one who died in infancy, 
 would be more suitably rendered Princess ; but with the Greeks 
 of Alexandria the words Bacri^syf and Ba£7■l^Ic^cra were given 
 to the members of the royal family, without any reference to 
 sovereignty over a state. 
 
 20 Berenice; as No. 33, 42. 
 
 21 The daughter; as No. 23, 26. 
 
 22 Of ; as No. 27, 18, &c. 
 
 23 The gods Euerget^; as No. 23, 23, &c. 
 
Line 27.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 97 
 
 24 In j as No. 5, 3, &c. 
 
 25 The TEMPLES ; as No. 5, 4, &c. 
 
 26 Op ; as No. 5, 5, &c. 
 
 27 The COUNTRY ; as No. 5, 6, &c. 
 
 28 At the TIMES j as No. 26, 8 ; but with the article, and without 
 the preposition before it. 
 
 29 At; as No. 26, 7, and 25, 27, &c. 
 
 30 Which ; as No. 23, 6, &c. 
 
 31 Once upon a time ; as No. 8, 20, and 21, 49, &c. 
 
 32 Probably, She was taken up. In No. 24, 9, we have what 
 seems to be this word written S,K,S ; here we have the K 
 omitted. The figure of the bird, and the sense required, lead us 
 to conjecture that this is an omission caused by accident, or haste. 
 See also No. 28, 3, for the same word without the feminine pro- 
 noun postfixed. 
 
 33 Among; E,M,M, or M,E,M; probably SJLBSi, with; the M 
 being used for N, as is not unusual. 
 
 34 The gods; as No. 5, 15 ; but here we have the plural formed, 
 not by repeating the word, but by three dots. 
 
 35 In; as No. 27, 24, &c. 
 
 36 The month of Tybi ; as No. 1, 6. 
 
 37 The MONTH in which ; as No. 3, 24. 
 
 Line 28, 
 
 1 Raj the Sun, the great god of Thebes ; R,E ; pH. 
 
 2 Himself; P,0 ; literally. The one ; IT the article and OVA., one. 
 
 3 Took up ; as No. 24, 9. 
 
 4 The DAUGHTER of Ra. See No. 27, 21, Daughter ; in addition 
 to which, we have the figure of the sun, ornamented with a sacred 
 asp. In Wilkinson's Materia Hierog. I. ix, we have an inscrip- 
 tion in honour of this goddess : " Hecate, the illustrious daughter 
 of Ra.'' The name Hecate, is the feminine of glK, a sorcerer, 
 and is spelt with the D.S. of our No. 35, 7, preceded with T, the 
 feminine article. The word Illustrious is our No. 26, 26. 
 
 5 To ; as No. 24, 10 ; 27, 29, &c. 
 
 6 The heavens; as No. 24, 11 ; but here we have the article 
 prefixed to the noun, as No. 20, 37, and 38. 
 
 H 
 
98 EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 28. 
 
 7 Is celebeated; as No. 3, 19, and No. 28, 43. The final F 
 is the sufiix of the third person singular. 
 
 8 Who; as No. 16, 8, and No. 28, 6, where it is used as the 
 article. 
 
 9 Unto him; H,T,r; g,<5.TEq. 
 
 10 She was ; N,S ; HEC, being in Coptic used as a prefix to the 
 word Named, which is to follow. 
 
 1 1 The apple of the eye, expressed pictorially. 
 
 12 And; H; A.gA.. 
 
 13 The; N,T; rfET, w^o, but only in the plural. It is here used 
 for nET. 
 
 14 Sacred Asp, being the figure of the asp, which was tied by a 
 ribband as an ornament to the forehead of the kings and statues 
 of the gods. In the Greek it is called the Diadem, or Crown, 
 
 15 Of; as No. 27, 24, &c. 
 
 16 His Head; the animaFs head is followed by T, the feminine 
 article to the word A.nE head; and then by F, the pronoun His. 
 
 17 The; as No. 23,43, &c. 
 
 18 Her name; as No. 23, 44. Thus the words The her name, 
 seem treated as a verb, and with the prefix No. 28, 10, become 
 She was named. 
 
 19 The; as No. 28, 17, &c. 
 
 20 Beloved; M,K; JUlEpE, to love. See No, 2, 13, for this 
 form of M. 
 
 21 This sitting figure of a man, with his hand to his mouth, must 
 here be held to be symbolical of kissing, following, as it does, the 
 word Beloved. At No. 27, 15, &c., it was the D.S. of speaking. 
 
 22 By; as No. 26,29, &c. 
 
 23 Her father. Compare No. 4, 4, Father, which is there 
 written with three letters instead of our single F, and followed 
 by His, instead of Her. The writer would seeoi in many places 
 to use fewer letters in each word, towards the latter part of the 
 inscription, than he did towards the beginning. 
 
 24 They shall celebrate; as No. 21, 36; 21, 41, &c. 
 
 25 Unto, preposition ; as No. 28, 22, &c, 
 
 26 Her; being a suffix to the preposition, as at No, 28, 23. 
 
Line 28.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 99 
 
 27 Assemblies; as No. 21, 34, &c. 
 
 28 By, or with, preposition ; as No. 28, 22, &c. 
 
 29 Water procession, represented pictorially by a pair of arms 
 holding an oar. In the Rosetta Stone a similar character means 
 Sculptured or a Statue, as the arms are then supposed to hold a 
 chisel. 
 
 30 In, from, or unto; preposition, as No. 28, 15, &c. 
 
 31 The sanctuary; or inner room of a temple; as No. 16, 32. 
 
 32 Great, in the plural ; as No. 5, 2, &c. 
 
 33 The greater part, according to the Greek; CH, T; KCUTG 
 fulness, or perhaps simply KET, the others, as it is translated at 
 No. 30, 7. 
 
 34 Of the temples. This is the word No. 25, 12, written with 
 another form of the M, and repeated three times, instead of being 
 followed by three dots. These three words, Great, fulness, temples, 
 are the rude translation of 5r?i£ioo-iv hpoi?. Such a comparison 
 of the two shows that the Greek was the origiiyil, and the Hiero- 
 glyphics the translation, 
 
 35 Of the first rank; as No. 25, 13, &c. 
 
 36 In; preposition, as No. 28, 15, &c. 
 
 37 Month ; a moon, followed R,E, for the D.S. of time, as 
 No. 17, 6, but with the omission of two of the. letters. As the 
 words become repeated, they are written in shorter form. 
 
 38 That; as No. 32, 30, &c. 
 
 39 When the making ; some part of ipi, to make, as at No. 17, 33, 
 and 18, 25, &c. 
 
 40 A GODDESS ; as No. 26, 33, and without the feminine termina- 
 tion to the word. 
 
 41 Of; as No. 28, 22, &c. 
 
 42 The QUEEN. The word is composed of the sceptre which forms 
 part of No. 1, 11, Reign; and of No. 3, 18, His Majesty; and 
 this is followed by S, the feminine termination, or pronoun, and 
 the D.S. of a woman. 
 
 43 Is celebrated ; as No. 28, 7, and No. 29, 19. 
 
 44 In addition; as No. 15, 3; and as No. 14, 35, and 36, in a 
 
 fuller form. 
 
 h3 
 
100 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [I'^"^ 28. 
 
 45 There shall be celebrated; as No. 17, 32, and 33, where, 
 however, it is written with several more letters. 
 
 46 An ASSEMBLY ; as No. 28, 27, &c. 
 
 47 One; as No. 19, 39, &c. 
 
 48 There shall be made; T,ll; Tpo, to make; as No. 26, 34. 
 But see No. 18, 8, where these letters are the word THp, cdl- 
 
 49 A WATER PROCESSION ; as No. 28, 29. 
 
 50 One ; as No. 28, 47. 
 
 51 Unto; as No. 28, 25, &c. 
 63 Queen ; as No. 27, 19, &c. 
 
 53 Berenice ; as No. 27, 20, &c. 
 
 54 Daughter; as No. 27, 21. 
 
 Line 29. 
 
 1 Oe; asNo. 27, 22. 
 
 2 The gods Euerget^; as No. 27, 23, &c, 
 
 3 In ; as No. 27, 24, &c. 
 
 4 The TEMPLES ; as No. 27, 25, &c. 
 
 5 Of ; as No. 27, 26, &c. 
 
 6 The TWO regions, meaning Upper and Lower Egypt, as at 
 No. 10, 44; and No. 18, 7; but here, after the name has been 
 written several times, the D.S. is thought sufficient. 
 
 7 In ; as No. 26, 7, &c. 
 
 8 The TIMES ; as No. 26, 8, &c. 
 
 9 Of ; as No. 29, 3, &c, 
 
 10 The month of Tybi ; as No. 27, 36. 
 
 11 From ; SH, A,N ; tyAM, wAen. 
 
 12 The SEVENTEETH DAY ; the numerals, as No. 15, 42, preceded 
 by the D.S. for Time, instead of the word Day. 
 
 13 Probably was kept or celebrated. The Eye here seems used 
 for the whole word. No. 28, 24, which has been so often written, 
 that now it is thought enough to carve the first letter only. 
 See the abridgment at No. 28, 45, where the same first letter 
 is used for a difi'erent word. See No. 24, 23, for the same 
 difficulty. 
 
 14 Her water procession; as No. 28, 49. The final S may be 
 Her. 
 
Line 29.] EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS^. 101 
 
 15 Was MADE for her; as No. 26, 34; and as No. 28, 48, 
 without the pronoun. 
 
 16 A LIBATION or purification; as No. 26, 35. 
 
 17 To heal; as No. 26,36. 
 
 18 Grief for her; as No. 26, 37. 
 
 19 "Was celebrated; as No. 19, 42, &c. 
 
 20 As on the day, is the meaning here required. The last 
 character is the D.S. for Day. The letters M,S,E, may be a 
 preposition. 
 
 21 First; literaWy, the Head ; A,? ; ^TJB, a head. 
 
 22 During; OUB, I,E0. A compound preposition, OYRe, 
 through, and R, as No. 26, 7. The first character usually repre- 
 sents OYA.fi., good, holy. See No. 14, 1. 
 
 23 Four days ; see No. 22, 35. 
 
 24 To SET UP ; M, the prefix of the infinitive mood, as at No. 17, 
 32 ; T,0,T, TOVtOT, an image ; followed by S, which may be 
 the feminine sign, as it is the statue of the princess ; and ending 
 with the D.S. of something erected. At No. 22, 19, and 20, this 
 word, without the D.S., is rendered to celebrate. 
 
 25 A SACRED STATUE ; being the word God, the systrum, or 
 musical instrument, which the statue is to hold, and the D.S. of 
 a woman, as it is to be the statue of a woman. 
 
 26 TJnto ; as No. 29, 1, &c. 
 
 27 The goddess; as No. 26, 33, but with the addition of the 
 usual feminine termination, which is there wanting. 
 
 28 The SAME; as No. 26, 24; the adjective following its substan- 
 tive. 
 
 29 Of ; as No. 29, 3, &c. 
 
 30 Gold ; being an ornamental dish or basket in which gold rings 
 are carried by men bringing tribute to the King in the sculptures 
 of Thothmosis III. Moreover, at No. 5, 9, we showed that a 
 dish was NEB, and hence represented ftOVfi., gold. 
 
 31 Polished; H,M; ^(iJiX, to polish. This may describe the 
 precious stones. On the other hand, it might be taken as two 
 words, H, and, and M, of. 
 
102 EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LmE 29. 
 
 32 Stones; SH, T ; ujOT, hard, followed by the D.S. of a stone. 
 See No. 1, 31, for the force of the first letter. 
 
 33 All ; as No. 5, 23. 
 
 34 A figure of the statue, which has been described. We might sup- 
 pose the final S was added because it was the statue of a woman ; 
 but we have the same final S following the same figure where the 
 statue is that of a king. There, however, it is described as a portable 
 statue, as this, which was to be made of gold, of course was. Hence 
 that final S belongs to some word which so describes the kind of 
 image. See Rosetta Stone, line 8. 
 
 35 In ; as No. 29, 3. 
 
 36 The Temples ; as No. 27, 25. Compare No. 28, 34. There 
 each character is repeated three times ; here one only is so 
 repeated, the other has the three dots. 
 
 37 Of FIRST RANK ; Compare No. 29, 40. 
 
 38 In ; as No. 29, 35, &c. 
 
 39 The TEMPLES ; as No. 29, 36, or rather as No. 28, 34. 
 
 40 Of SECOND RANK. 
 
 41 At ; as No. 29, 7, &c. 
 
 42 The TIMES ; as No. 29, 8, &c. 
 
 43 This word, R,T,E, seems to be the auxiliary verb ©pE with the 
 letters in a diff'erent order, and thus it forms part of the following- 
 word, as No. 37, 16. But see No. 11, 13, where we render it a 
 Reason. 
 
 Line 30. 
 
 1 To CONSECRATE ; M,T,E, FO ; iXB'T'TOT&.O, purity, and with 
 the foregoing auxiliary verb, to purify. 
 
 2 In ; as No. 29, 38, &c. 
 
 3 The HOLY PLACE ; ev rm dytoi, that is probably in the temple 
 proper, or house, as opposed to the temple-yard, which is 
 what is usually meant in this Decree by the word Temple. 
 The Greek distinguishes between the hpov, or temple-yard, 
 including the House; the dyiov, the holy building or house; 
 and the ad'urov, the inner chamber, the sanctuary, or holy of 
 holies. 
 
 4 The priest; as No. 2, 19; followed by the D.S. 
 
liIHE 30.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 103 
 
 6 The PROPHET, being the adjective to the foregoing substantive ; 
 E,0,E ; from pcJU, a mouth. 
 
 6 The sacred barge, but possibly meaning another person, the 
 priest of the barge, as a number of priests are here mentioned. 
 
 7 The OTHER ; CH, T ; KBT, other. See No. 28, 33 ; also 
 No. 3, 5, for another form of the word. 
 
 8 Priests ; as No. 1, 24, &c. 
 
 9 Chosen ; as No. 15, 26 ; though there we have an M as a prefix. 
 
 10 Of the puripications, as represented by the fire and water. See 
 No. 16, 23 ; and also No. 2, 21, where it seems to meanjjnes^s of 
 the libations, and is without the D.S. of water. 
 
 11 Great; as No. 25, 16, &c. ; the adjective to the foregoing 
 substantive. 
 
 1 2 The indefinite article to the following substantive ; as No. 5, 
 7, &c. ; or, possibly, And ; as No. 2, 3, &c. 
 
 13 Those who sing praises ; as No. 2, 22. 
 
 14 Of the Gods ; as No. 27, 34. 
 
 15 Those who robe the gods ; as No. 3, 2. 
 
 16 He shall take or carry ; S, MES,A,F ; from iU8.&.cy, to take, 
 with S the prefix of the future tense, as at No. 20, 39, and 
 21, 4, &c. ; and with I? the suffix of the third person singular. 
 That the first character is MES, see the name of Meshophra 
 Thothmosis I., called Mesapbris by Manetho; also the well- 
 known title over a king's second name of Lord of Battles, from 
 JUlA.cy, to strike, translated by Hermapion as Erave in War. It 
 is the picture of iiXH^, an anvil. 
 
 17 It ; the article, which we have only seen used in the nominative 
 case; but at No. 34, 10, it is used for Her, in the objective case. 
 
 18 In his two arms; H,P,T; gJTtOT a measure of length from 
 finger to finger when the arms are stretched out. 
 
 19 The D.S. to the foregoing word. In other places in this 
 inscription this character means Fortune or Accident, No. 8, 16, 
 and 13, 24, &c. This perhaps may be explained by supposing 
 that the resemblance between gntOT, the two arms, and gcjuTIl, 
 to fall down, or happen, was near enough to allow one to represent 
 the other. 
 
104 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Lll™ 30. 
 
 20 So that it may be seen ; see No. 37, 18, where it is rendered 
 Conspicuous in the Greek. 
 
 21 On or in; as No. 30, 2, where the M is of another form. 
 
 22 The DAY ; as at No. 29, 23, &c. 
 
 23 Op; as No. 28, 41, &c. 
 
 24 The TAKING UP or carrying out ; as No. 30, 16, but with the 
 grammatical prefix and suffix. In the Greek we have the Going 
 out, meaning the going out of the statues of the gods, which is 
 here called the Carrying out. 
 
 25 And ; as No. 25, 4, &c. 
 
 26 Assemblies ; as No. 28, 46, &c. 
 
 27 Op; as No. 29,5, &c. 
 
 28 The god, the singular of No. 30, 14. The god meant may be 
 Osiris, by the side of whose statue that of the princess was to be 
 placed ; but the Greek has The other gods ; and in the Hiero- 
 glyphics the singular is often used for the plural. 
 
 29 In ; as No. 29, 7, &c. 
 
 30 The TIMES ; as No. 29, 8, &c. 
 
 31 By; as No. 18, 44; 22, 45, &c. 
 
 32 This ; as No. 18, 45; 22, 46, &c. 
 
 33 Seen, according to the Greek ; but the force of the character 
 is uncertain. 
 
 34 By all; N,E,B ; fflBl, as No. 37, 32. 
 
 35 Men and women ; as No. 7, 26, &c. 
 
 36 All ; as No. 20, 21, &c., but with the addition of S,N, for the 
 plural. This is the adjective to the foregoing substantive, not- 
 withstanding the word by which it is preceded. 
 
 37 Worship ; represented by a man throwing himself on the 
 ground. 
 
 38 Is TO BE paid; as No. 5, 11 and 25, 20. Here our word 
 begins with M, the prefix of the infinitive mood, and ends with F, 
 the pronoun. 
 
 39 Perhaps At once, literally, endeavouring or putting out the hand; 
 H,T,0,T ; glTOT ; as No. 13, 15, and 18, 18, and 12, 17. This 
 word seems often to be almost an unnecessary expletive, that only 
 adds emphasis. See No. 36, 9, where it is also redundant. 
 
LiHE 30.] EXPLANATION OP THE HIEEOGIiTPHICS. 105 
 
 40 Unto ; as No. 27, 22, &c. 
 
 41 The distinguished or conspicuous; as No. 20, 26, &c. 
 
 42 Berenice ; as No. 28, 53, &c. 
 
 Line 31. 
 
 1 How, or in like manner ; H,N,A, glff A. or glflA.!. 
 
 2 The QUEEN ; being the D.S. of a woman, as throughout in this 
 inscription, and not distinguished by any mark of royalty from 
 the next D.S. 
 
 3 Of Women ; as No. 24, 8. 
 
 4 Is carried out ; as No. 30, 24. 
 
 5 Behold; as No. 23, 17, &c. But these two letters may 
 possibly belong one to- the former and one to the following word. 
 
 6 It is DECREED, as No. 21, 8, &c. 
 
 7 The, as No. 28, 17, &c. 
 
 8 Crown ; being a human head, but too small to show the orna- 
 ments upon it. 
 
 9 Upon ; as No. 30, 40. 
 
 10 The sacred statue ; as No. 29, 25. 
 
 11 That ; as No. 28, 38, &c. 
 
 12 Not prom ; or, according to the Greek, Not less than. See 
 No. 19, 25, Nothing. The M may be the preposition. 
 
 13 The religious ceremonies ; as No. 4, 7, and 19, 1. 
 
 14 Decreed or appointed ; as No. 31, 6 ; and preceded by R, 
 the auxiliary verb of action, as No. 21, 32. 
 
 15 The crown ; being the two words No. 31, 7, and 8; and in 
 each case without the final vowel. The artist shortens his words 
 when they occur a second time. 
 
 16 Of the Statues, meaning probably the little portable statues, 
 each within a small shrine or temple, about 18 inches high; R,P, 
 followed by T,S, the feminine termination of a woman's name, and 
 then by D.S. of the statue ; epne, the sanctuary of a temple. 
 
 17 Of; as No. 28, 41, &c. 
 
 18 Her Mother. The vulture, the syllable MAU, is often used 
 with this meaning, either with or without a final T for the article. 
 Our final S is the pronoun Her. 
 
106 EXPLANATION Of THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 81. 
 
 19 The QUEEN, being the hawk with the feminine article, and thus 
 the feminine of the word Pharaoh. See the use of the hawk in 
 No. 3, 18, His majesty. Thus, though in the Greek, mother and 
 infant daughter have the same title, they are very different in the 
 Hieroglyphics. 
 
 20 Berenice ; as No. 27, 20, &c. 
 
 21 It is to be placed. This is the word which we have repeatedly 
 rendered Kept, Held, or Celebrated, as of a festival. See No. 
 19, 33, where, as here, it is preceded by the auxiliary verb of 
 action. 
 
 22 Conspicuously ; as No. 20, 26, &c. 
 
 23 With ; the preposition M, as No. 29, 38, &c. ; but of the form 
 used in No. 29, 39. 
 
 24 Ears of corn ; SH, M,S, followed by the D.S. ; ^tSiXC, an 
 ear of corn. 
 
 25 Two; S,N, with two dots, as the D.S.; Clt^T, two. The 
 form of the S is unusual ; compare it with that in No. 1, 29. 
 
 26 An asp ; the figure of the animal, preceded by the indefinite 
 article. 
 
 27 On the back ; CH, T, with S,N, for the plural ; KOT, to turn 
 round. 
 
 28 A SCEPTRE ; the figure preceded by the indefinite article. 
 
 29 Of; as No. 30, 40, &c. 
 
 30 Papyrus flowers. The first letter, SH, represents these 
 plants ; it is followed by I, and then by the D.S. 
 
 31 Perhaps To be held up ; M, the prefix of the infinitive mood ; 
 K, KA., to place, and the D.S. of a man holding up. The value 
 of the final S does not appear. The Greek has To be of the same 
 height ; and that thought seems to be intended by the man's 
 action. 
 
 32 The PAPYRUS plant; as No. 31, 30, but written with fewer 
 letters. 
 
 33 The crown; as No. 31, 8. 
 
 34 The Asp; as No. 31, 26. 
 
 35 The same ; as 29, 28, &c. 
 
 36 Like ; as No. 27, 6, and 16, 40. 
 
Line SI.] EXPLANATION OP THE HIEaOGLYPHICS, 107 
 
 37 What is accustomed or cmtomary ; literally, Heard ; SOT, M ; 
 CCJUTeAA, to hear. See No. 4, 17, for the force of the first 
 character. 
 
 38 In the two hands ; represented pictorially. 
 
 39 Of the Goddesses ; as No. 29, 27, but in the plural, and 
 without the D.S. 
 
 40 The Tail ; S,T j CHT, a tail ; preceded by the indefiuite 
 article, and followed by the D . S. 
 
 41 Of; as No. 31, 9, &c. 
 
 42 The Asp; as No. 31, 34. 
 
 43 The same; as 31, 35, but with a diflPerent T. 
 
 44 Twisted ; EM, N,N ; perhaps from XAOrfJUlErf, anything 
 twisted ; and followed by the D.S. of the asp's tail. 
 
 45 On the sceptre ; as No. 31 , 28. 
 
 Line 32. 
 
 1 That ; the pronoun following its substantive ; as No. 31, 11, &c. 
 
 2 By Which ; as No. 30, 31, and 32. 
 
 3 Arrangement, in the plural, which is marked by S,M, in place 
 of the more usual S,N. See No. 18, 12, where we have the same 
 plural termination. But it is very possible that the M may be 
 part of the following preposition in which case the final N is 
 here wanting, or the M may be said to supply the sound wanted 
 for both words at the same time ; as they were written by the ear, 
 and not spelt grammatically. See No. 33, 7, and 8, for the 
 similar beginning of a sentence. 
 
 4 In ; N, as No. 28, 25 ; unless it be M,N, as at No. 7, 28. Here 
 it forms a compound preposition, with the next word. 
 
 5 Within; S,H,N ; C^gOYlt. This and the former word 
 together make one compound preposition, meaning Between; 
 and they may be compared to No. 7, 28, a similar compound 
 preposition. The flower is an at No. 2, 22, and is so placed 
 that it might be taken for the vowel in this word. But it is 
 necessary to take it as the substantive following it. 
 
 6 The EARS OF corn; as No. 3 1 , 24, but the D.S. only, without 
 the spelt word. Here the Greek has The crown; but the two 
 have the same meaning, as the ears of corn were to be placed 
 upon the statue as its crown. 
 
108 EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LlNB 32. 
 
 7 That, or rather Those, as its noun is in the plural. See 
 No. 32, 1. This pronoun following its substantive proves that 
 the flower is a word by itself, as described, and not the letter 0, 
 part of the foregoing preposition. No. 32, 5. 
 
 8 May be shown. On the Rosetta Stone we have these three 
 characters in one, with the same meaning. The sitting man holds 
 out the tablet with his outstretched arm. In that case the character 
 is strictly pictorial. Here it is less so. 
 
 9 The; as No. 31, 7, &c. 
 
 10 Name ; being the oval within which the queen's name is 
 written; as No. 28, 18, &c. 
 
 11 Op; as No. 30, 23, &c. 
 
 12 Bekenice ; as No. 31, 20, &c. 
 
 13 The ; as No. 32, 9, &c. 
 
 14 Characteus, or conspicuous marks, written, as it would seem, 
 pictorially, by means of a peculiar character, then the plural sign, 
 and then the word Conspicuous. The letter T may be the feminine 
 article. 
 
 15 Op; as No. 30, 2, &c. 
 
 16 The Scribes ; as No. 18, 22, though at No. 37, 10, it means 
 letters. 
 
 17 Of, as No. 18, 23, &c. 
 
 18 Heavenly lipe ; as No. 18, 24. 
 
 19 And. In some cases it seems doubtful whether these letters, 
 A,0, are the article or the conjunction ; but here it seems clear, 
 as at No. 2, 3. 
 
 20 During the celebration. The letters here are in an irregular 
 order ; but on comparison with the Greek, we cannot be wrong in 
 recognizing I,0,T, to keep or celebrate, as No. 17, 21, and 32, 35, 
 &c.; and then the R,R, may be EgpHI, upon, as No. 15, 10, &c. 
 
 21 Of the Days ; as No. 22, 10, but in the plural. 
 
 22, 23. The ceremony called in the Greek The Kikellia, possibly 
 the festival already described in Lines 51 and 52 of the Greek, as 
 the same month is the time for each. The first letters are K,A, 
 which correspond with the word Kikellia. 
 
Lire S2.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 109 
 
 24 In ; as No. 28, 16, &c. 
 
 25 The month of Chceac ; as No. 26, 3. 
 
 26 In addition to ; as No. 15, 3, and 28, 44. 
 
 27 The WATER procession ; as No. 28, 29. 
 
 28 Of Osiris ; as No. 25, 5. 
 
 29 It shall be granted ; as No. 9, 20. This must be distinguished 
 from No. 29, 43, where the hand does not hold the pyramid. 
 
 30 Unto ; A,N j the preposition It, which is more usually, in 
 this inscription, written without the vowel, as No. 31, 29, &c. 
 
 31 The WOMEN ; as No. 31, 3. 
 
 32 The WIVES, as No. 4, 35. The Greek here has ^ra^flsvoi, a word 
 which in the Hellenistic dialect of Alexandria, was not limited to 
 unmarried maidens, but meant young women. 
 
 33 Or, as No. 32, 17, &c. 
 
 34 The priests; as No. 30, 8, &c. 
 
 35 To PREPARE ; as No. 17, 21, and 32, 20, where we translate it, 
 to celebrate, 
 
 36 Another ; K,T,T ; K6T, as No. 16, 27, &c. The second T may 
 be the feminine article, showing that the first T is part of the word. 
 
 37 Statue ; as No. 31, 16. 
 
 38 Of; as No. 31,41, &c. 
 
 39 Berenice ; as No. 31, 20, &c. 
 
 40 Chief ; E,T ; perhaps EET, may mean Great, though it is used 
 for Pregnant. Our hieroglyphical word is often met with, and 
 always with this meaning. Voc. 1372. 
 
 41 Of WOMEN ; as No. 32, 31. 
 
 42 Performing, celebrating; as No. 32, 35, with S,Nj for the 
 plural. 
 
 43 Sacrifices ; as No. 26, 10. 
 
 44 And ; as No. 30, 25, &c. 
 
 45 Other things ; as No. 20, 20, &c. 
 
 Line 33. 
 
 1 Shall be celebrated ; as No. 28, 45, which has the prefix of 
 the infinitive mood, while here we have S, the prefix of the future 
 tense. No. 20, 22, is in the same tense. 
 
 2 Upon; N,I,M; U6JUI; as No. 2, 10, and 23, 11. 
 
110 EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 33. 
 
 3 The Days; as No. 32, 21. 
 
 4 Or ; as No. 32, 33, &c. 
 
 5 Assembly ; as No. 28, 27, Sec. 
 
 6 That ; as No. 32, 1, &c. 
 
 7 Because of this, by this ; as No. 32, 2, &c. 
 
 8 It is Decreed ; as No. 32, 3 ; and as 9, 14, but we have 
 another letter in addition. 
 
 9 Behold ; as No. 19, 8, &c. 
 
 10 For J E,M, instead of M, the more usual preposition, as No. 
 29, 38, &c. 
 
 11 Other; as No. 20, 20, but pi-eceded by a K, which may be for 
 KET, other, and thus give to the word a reduplicate form. 
 
 12 Women ; as No. 32, 31, &c. 
 
 13 Who ARE willing; EI, R,M; probably et, to be, and pA-K, 
 willing. The M may be for N, as is not unusual. 
 
 14 Shall celebrate ; as No. 33, 1. 
 
 15 Their own; N,0U,0U; rtOYOV ; as No. 11, 1. 
 
 16 Unto; as No. 29, 1, &c. 
 
 17 Goddess ; as No. 29, 27. 
 
 18 That same ; the adjective to the foregoing substantive ; as 
 No. 29, 28, &c. 
 
 19 Hymns ; M, perhaps for EJUll, to remember, preceded by R, the 
 verb of action, and followed by S,N, for the plural. See No. 3, 
 19, and 28, 43, for this word to celebrate. 
 
 20 Sing. The man in the act of praying is followed by the letters 
 0,T, which must make some such word as OVpOT, to sing. See 
 No. 34, 8, where this is confirmed. 
 
 21 To the goddess; as No. 33, 17. 
 
 22 That same ; as No. 33, 18. 
 
 23 Behold ; as No. 33, 9. 
 
 24 Under ; the preposition as No. 32, 30 ; which in other places 
 is written without the vowel. 
 
 25 The priestesses. This is the word SET, No. 1, 12, in the 
 feminine and with the D.S. They are therefore priestesses of the 
 very first rank, as we shall be told at No. 33, 43. 
 
Line 83.] EXPLANATION OV THE HIEROGLYPHICS. Ill 
 
 26 Chosen ; as No. 30, 9. 
 
 27 Another class of Priests, or, according to the Greek, Priestesses; 
 possibly Servants of the gods, may be the literal rendering. The 
 first letter is perhaps a B, and may represent RtOK, a servant. As 
 the hatchet, God, is pronounced NOU, the whole word may' be 
 Bockanou, the name of one of the four orders of priests, and 
 written at length in Egypt. Inscript. pi. 32. Here these servants 
 are women. 
 
 / 28 Who CARRY ; as No. 30, 24, &c, 
 
 29 The prefix of the case, which, when the case is the accusative, we 
 do not express in English ; but we treat it as a preposition when 
 it represents any other case. 
 
 30 The things that are carried ; as No. 33, 28 ; in the Greek, 
 the necessaries. 
 
 31 Of; asNo. 33, 4, &c. 
 
 32 The Gods ; as No. 30, 14, &c. 
 
 33 To whom they are appointed ; or decreed ; as No. 32, 
 3, &c. 
 
 34 For ; as No. 33, 29, &c. 
 
 35 The priestly women; being the word Priest, as No. 30, 8, 
 followed by the D.S. of a woman, and a double plural termination, 
 
 36 Is made ; AjR, EpE ; being the auxiliary prefix to the verb 
 No. 33, 39, from which it is separated by the interjection and 
 the nominative. See No. 25, 29, and 33, 6, in both which cases 
 it is separated from its chief word. 
 
 37 Behold ; as No. 33, 9. 
 
 38 The early corn, the unripe seed, is required by the Greek. 
 
 39 Sprung up ; R,T,E ; pHT. This is the literal meaning of 
 the word which we have so often I'endered as Added; No. 32. 
 26, &c. 
 
 40 Made itself conspicuous; the sitting figure Conspicuous, 
 as No. 31, 22, &c. preceded by R,R,ll, of which E, may be 
 the auxiliary verb to niakf, and Il,R, the preposition EgpHJ, as 
 No. 15, 10, &c. 
 
 41 Ears of corn; as No. 31, 24, but with a different D.S. 
 
112 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEllOGLYPHICS. [hvm 33. 
 
 42 Shall bring; A,N; eme, to bring. See No. 26, 32. 
 
 43 The PRIESTESSES ; as No. 33, 25. 
 
 44 Of the first rank ; as No. 28, 35, &c., preceded by the 
 indefinite article. 
 
 Line 34. 
 
 1 Give ; as No. 32, 29, where it was preceded by the auxiliary 
 verb. 
 
 2 Unto; as No. 32, 11, &c, 
 
 3 The Statue; as No. 31, 10, but without the D.S., which 
 becomes less necessary when the word has been already written. 
 
 4 Of; asNo. 31, 29, &c. 
 
 5 Goddess; as No, 33, 17. 
 
 6 The same; as No. 33, 18, &c. 
 
 7 Songs ; H,0,S ; gOJC ; and again at No. 34, 36, 
 
 8 Sing ; as No. 33, 20, though there the man is using his hands, 
 or praying, and here he points to his mouth. This figure is po, 
 a mouth, and with the 0,T, which follow, and the addition of an 
 article at the beginning, becomes OVpOT, to sing. The article OV 
 was probably often in this way sounded when not written ; as we 
 have numerous instances in kings^ names of the letters EA, the 
 sun, being pronounced Phra, by the addition of the definite article. 
 
 9 Unto ; as No. 34, 2, &c. 
 
 10 Her ; P,E ; llE, which in Coptic is masculine. He, Him. See 
 No. 30, 17, where this word is also in the objective case. 
 
 11 The D.S., a sitting figure, without the head-dress distinctive of 
 a woman, but made feminine by the S which follows it. 
 
 12 Upon, at; as No. 32, 30. 
 
 13 Appointed; T,0,S, TOUcy. For the force of the S, see 
 No. 11, 40. 
 
 14 Times; probably the same character as the first in the word 
 No. 29, 8, to which we have so often given that meaning. 
 
 15 These songs; as No. 34, 7. 
 
 16 The MEN and women shall sing; the man alone points to his 
 mouth ; but that may be enough to show that the women also are 
 to sing. 
 
 17 The men; P,E; JTH, He, in the plural, because of the three 
 
Link 34.] EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 113 
 
 dots. See No. 2, 1 , for the force of the first letter, and No. 2, 10, 
 for the force of the second. 
 
 18 The -WIVES ; as No. 32, 32, &c. 
 
 19 In PLACES ; M,A, AJIA., a place. The conjunction which follows, 
 and separates this word from a similar word, namely, assemblies, 
 proves its meaning. See No. 35, 4. 
 
 20 And ; as No. 20, 19, &c. 
 
 21 Assemblies ; as No. 22, 25, &c. 
 
 22 Carryings out; as No. 33, 30, &c. 
 
 23 Of; as No. 33, 31. 
 
 24 The GODS ; as No. 33, 32. 
 
 25 Songs, or words ; M,S ; with D.S. of a man in the act of 
 prayer ; perhaps the S may be {iJCO to speak, with M, the prefix 
 of the case. 
 
 26 From AMONG, or FROM the bottom. See No. 17, 17, where it 
 is rendered At first. It is the preposition, or adverb, CA^pHI, 
 and partakes of its very various meanings. The E,R is for H,R, 
 as at No. 20, 24, &c. 
 
 27 Which; N,T,T,E ; rfCT; the pronoun to the foregoing word 
 Songs. 
 
 28 A MAN ; represented pictorially. 
 
 29 Of ; as No. 34, 23, &c. 
 
 30 Heavenly Life; as No. 32, 18, &c. 
 
 31 Shall give; as No. 34, 1, &c. 
 
 32 Unto; as No. 34,2, &c. 
 
 33 The chief; M,R; JLtpG; as No. 2, 17, where it is preceded 
 by the indefinite article. In other and earlier inscriptions these 
 two letters are sometimes followed by a K ; and then the word 
 resembles the Hebrew ^^0. See Voc. 680. 
 
 34 Learned man; S,B,E; Cfi.UJ. 
 
 35 Of; as No. 34, 23, &c. 
 
 36 The SINGERS ; as No. 34, 15, and 16. 
 
 37 To WRITE ; see Scribe, No. 36, 29. 
 
 38 A copy; H,T,T; from gE, like, as No. 15, 4. See No, 31, 36. 
 
 39 The ; as No. 31, 7, &c. 
 
 40 Books; as No. 37, 12. Voc. 335. 
 
114 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Ll»E 35. 
 
 41 Of; as No. 34, 29, &c. 
 
 42 Heavenly life ; as No. 34, 30. 
 
 43 Because of this ; as No. 33, 7, &c. 
 
 44 "When are distributed ; A,T,0,T ; perhaps from TOl, to dis- 
 tribute, with E, the prefix of the verb's mood; or perhaps 
 'i"g,l(JU'T (0 place, a verb formed of THI, to give, and gltOT, 
 upon. 
 
 45 Dedicated loaves. The first character, 0, is a very frequent 
 abridgment of 0V0T6R, No. 25, 1 ; the second is a loaf 
 represented pictorially, as No. 35, 38. 
 
 46 Unto ; as No. 34, 9, &c. 
 
 47 The priests ; as No. 32, 34, &c. 
 
 48 Prom ; as No. 33, 34, &c. 
 
 49 The ; as No. 28, 8, &c. 
 
 50 Temples ; as No. 29, 4, &c. 
 
 51 Of the family; as No. 26, 20. 
 
 b2 Those already; as No. 14, 8; and 16, 21, where it is in the 
 singular, and as No. 14, 20, when it is in the plural, as bere. 
 
 Line 35. 
 
 1 Of ; the preposition It, as No. 32, 30 ; or it may be 6me, Is 
 brought, as No. 33, 42. 
 
 2 The Set, or chief priest, as No. 8, 24; and distinguished as 
 there by his peculiar crown. But here the Greek has " When 
 they are brought out to the multitude." The scribe seems to have 
 been confused between this word for Priest, and 5=ycxi, a multitude. 
 The two meanings, which the last word will bear, leave us in the 
 difficulty. 
 
 3 Of the TEMPLE ; as No. 25, 38 ; but here preceded by the article. 
 
 4 Of a PLACE ; E,M,T, or M,E,I; for the vowel, written across the 
 M may be read in either place j JH^I, a place, preceded by the 
 article. See No. 34, 1 9. 
 
 5 There shall be distributed ; as No. 34, 44. 
 
 6 Presence ; N,R ; n A.g,p£, a preposition composed of HA., 
 belonging to, and ^pA., the face. It is used as the adjective to 
 the following word Loaves ; and it thus describes them as brought 
 
Line 3P.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 115 
 
 into the temple into the presence of the statue. It is the counter- 
 part of the Hebrew >:zb, unto the face, from which the bread of 
 the temple was called O'lD Qrr^, presence-bread. See No. 36, 23 ; 
 but see -also No. 14,35, where these letters are a verbal prefix. 
 The doubt between the two meanings is removed by the D.S. 
 
 7 Loaves; represented pictorially, as at No. 36, 10, where this 
 character is used as the D.S. after the word spelt by letters. 
 
 8 Unto ; as No. 34, 32, &c, 
 
 9 The DAUGHTERS ; M,S,0, plural; from XXBC, born. See No. 
 13, 29, Birth, also No. 37, 44, Children. The is the plural 
 termination, and is very unnecessarily followed by the three dots. 
 
 10 Of the CHIEFS ; as No. 32, 40. This is usually, perhaps 
 always, a feminine title. 
 
 11 Op; as No. 34, 23, &c. 
 
 12 The PRIESTS ; as No. 34, 47, &c. 
 
 13 • Since ; as No. 24, 16, and 14, 25. 
 
 14 The Day; as No. 33, 3, &c. 
 
 ] 5 When they were born ; as No. 35, 9. 
 
 16 Was REMEMBERED, Or CELEBRATED; as No. 29, 1 9. Thusit 
 would seem that their right to food was not counted from their 
 birthday, but from some ceremonial festival which soon followed 
 it, like the day of baptism among Christians. 
 
 17 From; as No. 34,48, &c. 
 
 18 The ; as No. 34, 49, &c. 
 
 19 Sacred dedicated loaves ; being composed of the words God, 
 No. 33, 32 ; and Dedicated loaves. No. 34, 45. In the copy of 
 the Decree at Paris, we find here, instead of the two words, Dedicated 
 Loaves, the word No. 14, 34, in the plural. Appointed things. 
 
 20 Of; as No. 35, 11, &c. 
 
 2 1 The GODS ; as No. 33, 32, &c. In the Paris copy this word is 
 written with three hatchets, and without the three dots. 
 
 22 Out of ; as No. 25, 44. In the Paris copy we have the owl 
 instead of this character. 
 
 23 The presence-loaves ; as No, 35, 6, and 7. They are called 
 in the Greek the sacred revenue. 
 
 24 Marked with a pattern. This meaning we learn from 
 
 I 2 
 
116 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Line 35. 
 
 No. 36, 6. The cross may be the D.S. of the pattern on each loaf 
 or cake. The pricked cakes, so often mentioned in the Hebrew 
 Law, as in Leviticus vii., 12, do not seem to have been marked with 
 any pattern, but simply pricked, to make them less heavy, because 
 they were not made with leaven. These Egyptian loaves may be 
 compared rather to the Christian crossed-buns eaten on Good 
 Friday. 
 
 25 Adjudged; as No. 16, 47, and 22, 16. 
 
 26 By; as No. 32, 30. 
 
 27 The priests; as No. 35, 12, &c. 
 
 28 The senators ; as No. 16, 2. 
 
 29 In; as No. 30, 21, &c. 
 
 30 The SANCTUARY, or cell of the temple; as No. 28, 31, and 
 16, 32. 
 
 31 Of the TWO REGIONS, of Upper and Lower Egypt ; being the 
 word Land, followed by the dual sign. * 
 
 32 Upon ; as No, 29, 7, &c. 
 
 33 The TIMES ; as No. 29, 8 ; meaning, as it would seem, hence- 
 forth. 
 
 34 Like or agreeably to ; as No. 31, 36, and 27, 6. 
 
 35 The mouth, meaning the command ; R,E ; po, the mouth. 
 
 36 Of ; as No. 34, 32, &c. 
 
 37 The priests of the dedicated loaves; though there is nothing 
 to distinguish this word from No. 35, 19, where the loaves were 
 meant. In the Greek we have Priests of the revenue. 
 
 38 The Loaves; A,K; A.IK, bread, followed by the D.S. and the 
 three dots. Without the D.S. it could not be distinguished from 
 the word Dedication, 
 
 39 Which ARE GIVEN ; as No. 9, 20 j but distinct from No. 29, 43. 
 
 Line 36. 
 
 1 Unto ; as No. 35, 36, &c. 
 
 2 The WIVES ; as No. 34, 18, with the addition of the D.S. 
 
 3 Op; as No. 35, 11, &c. 
 
 4 The priests ; as No. 35, 27, &c. 
 
 5 Shall be marked ; as No. 28, 24, &c., as it would seem, though 
 the order of the last two letters is reversed. There and elsewhere 
 it is rendered to celebrate, as of a festival. 
 
Line 36] EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 117 
 
 6 With a PATTERN ; according to the Greek. See No. 35, 24, and 
 22, 15, where the Greek does not help us. 
 
 7 To be IMPRESSED ; MjK,r ; perhaps from KCX), to put on, preceded 
 by M, the sign of the infinitive mood, and followed by F, for the 
 third person singular. See No. 36, 13, for a word of the same 
 grammatical form. 
 
 8 Upon the loaf ; Upon, as No. 36, 1, &c. ; Loaf, as No. 35, 38. 
 
 9 Put thereon ; as No. 30, 39, where we have remarked that 
 this word is often of no use but to add emphasis. 
 
 10 The LOAVES ; as No. 35, 38, where the letters have the same 
 force, though different in form. 
 
 11 Op; as No. 30, 40, &c. 
 
 12 Berenice; as No. 32, 39, &c. 
 
 13 To BE named; see No. 23, 44. This is a word of the same 
 form as No. 36, 7, beginning with the sign of the infinitive, and 
 ending with that of the third person singular. 
 
 14 The LEARNED PROPHET ; S,B,E,0 ; cRco, learned, while the 
 figure, pointing to his mouth, tells us that he is a speaker. 
 
 15 That same ; as No. 32, 1. 
 
 16 Of; as No. 30, 31, feci 
 
 17 The PLACE ; as No. 35, 4. 
 
 18 Another D.S. of this prophet. 
 
 19 The scribe; as No. 32, 16, &c. 
 
 20 Consecrated; 0,T,F; being the same as 0,T,P, No. 25, 1. 
 CUTA, to dedicate. This is very possibly the original, though 
 less usual, way of writing the word ; as it may be a past participle 
 of OVOT, to separate. 
 
 21 Of the senators ; as No. 35, 28. 
 
 22 Of; as No. 25, 44, &c., meaning the representatives of, as we 
 see there had been only twenty, and were for the future to be 
 only twenty-five senators to represent the whole priesthood of the 
 kingdom. 
 
 23 The priests of the temples. The character for temples is 
 here used as an adjective descriptive of the man that follows. 
 
 24 All; as No. 18, 8. 
 
118 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [Like 36. 
 
 25 The chief; as No. 34, 33. 
 
 26 Of the TEMPLE-YARD ; as No. 2P, 4, &c. But here used in 
 opposition to No. 36, 23, and therefore the general word Temple is 
 unsuitable. It is an adjective to the figure of a man that follows, 
 as No. 36, 23. 
 
 27 The PRIESTS ; being the figure of a man distinguished by the 
 foregoing adjective. The distinction between the Temples of No. 
 36, 23, and those of No. 36, 26, is not explained. We can observe, 
 however, that the first represents a standing building, and the 
 other only a ground plan, perhaps a court-yard, as distinguished 
 from the building that stood within it. In this way the upper and 
 lower ranks of priests seem to be distinguished. 
 
 28 And ; as No. 34, 20, &c. 
 
 29 The SCRIBES ; as No. 32, 16 ; but here followed by the D.S. of 
 a man. 
 
 30 Of ; as No. 36, 3, &c. 
 
 31 The TEMPLES; here described as sacred buildings; as No. 
 35, 3. In the copy of the Decree at Paris this word is slightly 
 
 enlarged, being written as No. 26, 23. 
 
 32 Shall CARVE ; 0, CH,T; followed by the D.S. of a chisel and 
 a slab of stone; from EKCOT a builder. See No. 12, 32, Lord 
 of the builders. 
 
 33 The; as No. 31, 7, &c. 
 
 3i Inscription; SH, A,A,T; from C*>HT, a writing. See 
 No. 21, 23, for the force of the first letter. 
 
 Line 37. 
 
 1 On a TABLET ; represented pictorially, as on the Rosetta Stone. 
 
 2 Of; as No. 34,, 4, &c. 
 
 3 Stone ; A,N,B,; with D.S.; COffl, stone. The force of the R 
 is not evident ; it might possibly make the word into Hewn stone, 
 from ipi to make. 
 
 5 Copper; but how to be read is uncertain ; R,E,P,0,E, plural. 
 The latter letters may perhaps represent gA-GOOY, bright ; as 
 the plural sign has the force of OU. 
 
 6 In ; as No. 34, 48, &c. 
 
 7 LiiiTERS ; as No. 36, 29, where it is part of the word Scribe. 
 
Line 37.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 119 
 
 8 Of ; as No. 36, 30, &c. 
 
 9 Heavenly life ; as No. 34, 30, &c. These " letters of heavenly 
 life " are the Hieroglyphics. 
 
 10 Letters ; as No. S7, 7, &c. 
 
 11 For; as No. 35, 36, &c. 
 
 12 Books; as No. 34, 40. These "letters for books" are the 
 enchorial, or common running hand, seen upon the papyrus-rolls. 
 This portion of the inscription was never executed on this tablet, 
 which has only two out of the three portions. On the tablet at 
 Paris all three inscriptions were duly carved. 
 
 13 Letters; as No. 37, 10. 
 
 14 For; as No. 37, 11, &c. 
 
 15 The Greeks; or possibly for Lower Egypt; as that plant is 
 sometimes typical of that district. 
 
 16 The auxiliary verb to the coming word, from -©pG, to make; as 
 No. 29, 43. The letters are not in the order of the Coptic word. 
 This must be distinguished from No. 35, 39, where the hand 
 holds a pyramid. 
 
 17 To be SET UP, as in the Rosetta Stone. See also No. 29, 24, 
 for the first character. 
 
 18 In a conspicuous ; according to the Greek, which fixes the 
 meaning of this character for the other parts of this inscription. 
 
 19 Place ; the M used for the longer word of No. 36, 4, and 
 36, 17 ; and followed by a D.S. 
 
 20 Op ; as No. 36, 30, &c. 
 
 21 Men and Women ; as No. 22, 43, &c. 
 
 22 In ; as No. 37, 6, &c. 
 
 23 The TEMPLES ; as No. 34, 50. This, we see, is the word in its 
 widest sense, including temples of the very various kinds distin- 
 guished by the other names herein used. 
 
 24 Of the first rank; as No. 25, 13. 
 
 25 Temples ; as No. 37, 23, and No. 28, 34, the change in the 
 letter M making no difiierence in the word. 
 
 26 Of the second rank ; distinguished by the dual sign. 
 
 27 Temples ; as No. 37, 23, &c. 
 
 28 Of the THIRD RANK ; distinguished by the three dots. 
 
120 EXPLANATION OP THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LlNE 37. 
 
 29 So that there may be given; as No. 35, 39, but preceded by 
 an R, which may be the preposition. 
 
 30 Perhaps, a sight, if we may consider the eye as the D.S. of 
 the foregoing word. 
 
 31 The ; as No. 36, 33 ; perhaps Of it. 
 
 32 All ; N,E,B ,- ftlRl ; as No. 30, 34. 
 
 33 Men and Women ; as No. 30, 35, and followed by the word 
 All, in a shorter form than No. 30, 36. 
 
 34 How TO peepabb; as No. 5, 11, &c., and preceded by M, the 
 sign of the infinitive mood. 
 
 35 By ; as we must make the sentence conform to the. Greek ; but 
 it would seem, from the order of the words, more like For. 
 
 36 The Priests ; as No. 30, 8, &c. 
 
 37 Of; as No. 36,30, &c. 
 
 38 The temples ; as No. 37, 23, &c. 
 
 39 Of the cities ; as No. 5, 33^ 
 
 40 Of Egypt ; as No. 5, 34. 
 
 41 For; as No. 31,29, &c. 
 
 42 The GODS Ecerget^; as No. 1, 31, &c. 
 
 43 And ; as No. 36, 28, &c. 
 
 44 Their children, both male and female, as shown by the D.S. 
 Prom M,S, born ; see No. 35, 9, &c. 
 
 45 Behold ; as No. 33, 9, &c. ; but with a difi"erent A. 
 
 46 The RELIGIOUS ceremonies ; as No. 19, 1, and 28, 45. 
 
 47 For; as No. 37, 14, &c. 
 
 48 The doings ; as No. 4, 38, and 17, 33. 
 
 WoodfaU and Kinder, Printers, Milford 'Lane, Strand, London, W.G 
 
^ I. >■ 
 
 ^4 ^^ i,feifiJifi».'-'S° ^A/ ,.